Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

and customize the project as necessary. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. 13 Click OK. sections. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. the door retains this relationship to the partition. and schedules required for a building project. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. construction. In this case. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. scope. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For most tutorial projects. drawings. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. In this case.rte.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. review the Revit Architecture templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. drawing sheets. and open Metric\Templates. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. schedules. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. you will use the default template. the hierarchy of elements. how to navigate the user interface. quantities. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. every drawing sheet. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. click Training Files. 2D and 3D view. You learn the terminology. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. the floor or roof remains connected. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. If you move the partition. hence. and phases when you need it. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. As you work in drawing and schedule views. If the length of the elevation is changed. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and residential. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the operation of the software is parametric. In the Revit Architecture model. and plans. 12 Select DefaultMetric. and click Open. the parameter is one of association or connection. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.

The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. tags. dimensions. If you can draw. For example.When you change something. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. They help to describe or document the model. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. doors. programming is not required. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. walls and roofs are hosts. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. filled regions. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. walls. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. windows. doors. Datum elements help to define project context. windows. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. levels. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. tags. grids. For example. They display in relevant views of the model. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. Examples include detail lines. For example. dimensions. and 2D detail components. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and cabinets are model components. and roofs are model elements.

for example. top of wall. first floor. To place levels. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. This information includes components used to design the model. However. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. section views. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. elevation views. Often. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. and ceilings. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.In Revit Architecture. and so forth). In other cases. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. and drawings of the design. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. you must be in a section or elevation view. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. from geometry to construction data. views of the project. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you can explicitly control them. such as roofs. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. floors. Most often. or bottom of foundation. By using a single project file. you do nothing to establish these relationships. families. The project file contains all information for the building design. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . for example. schedules. Project: In Revit Architecture. and types.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. In the steps that follow. ceilings. dimensions. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. identical use. categories of model elements include walls and beams.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. For example. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. In the following illustration. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . making it easy to understand what each button represents. A type can also be a style. specifically its clear user interface. the user interface is labeled. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. and levels. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. floors. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. System families can be transferred between projects. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. However. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. roofs. and similar graphical representation. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. System families include walls. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

By default.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. click (New). This creates a new project based on the default template. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. you type the required key combination to perform the command. and View. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. While working in the drawing area. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. Edit. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. For example. which are listed on the menu.

when you add a door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. On the left side of the Options Bar. When you select the Door tool. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . For example. a door type is specified.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. 9 In the Type Selector.

■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. In the drawing area. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. immediately below the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector.

14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .11 Click OK. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. click the tab in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. select Views (all). In the Project Browser.

reports. double-click its name. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. and rename views. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . windows). To open a view. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. The browser is dockable. family category (doors. schedules. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. delete. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. and group name. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. 3D). families. families. elevations. and groups. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. sheets. walls.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views.

16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Wall. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. The cursor displays as a pencil. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In this case. click Cancel. In the bottom left corner of the window. Do not click. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. After creating a browser organization scheme.

In addition. You can also press SHIFT+F1. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. In the status bar. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Click the Help button. in conjunction with tooltips. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). and then click a specific menu command or button for help. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. If no Help button displays. regarding selected elements in a view. You can use this tri-pane. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. click on the Standard toolbar. Tooltips: To see tooltips.18 On the Design Bar. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. After you are familiar with these tasks. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. There are several tools that help you find information. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Windows: From any window. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. press F1 for context-sensitive help. It highlights when the cursor is over it. find a keyword on the Index tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Toolbar: From the toolbar. 20 Press TAB. press F1 for help. click Modify to end the Wall command. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. When you place the cursor over an element. The status bar also provides information. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area.

There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). For example. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.rvt. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. In the following steps. In the drawing area. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the view zooms out from the building model.

click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. on the View toolbar. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. When you release the mouse button. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 12 Click and hold the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 7 Click in the drawing area. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 10 To display SteeringWheels. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. As you move the mouse. If you do not have a wheel mouse. the view zooms in on the selected area. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. this is referred to as a crossing selection. .

referred to as shape handles. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. expand Views (all). as shown. display along the ends. moving the wheel to the desired location. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and select the wall. Small blue dots. 17 Type ZR. click Settings menu ➤ Options. These are the drag controls. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. called drag controls. When drawing or modifying a building model. Cnst. bottoms. and click Help. and then using the Zoom tool again. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and click the SteeringWheels tab. Similar controls. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 15 To exit the wheel. expand Floor Plans. press ESC. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. and double-click 2nd Flr. For more information about SteeringWheels.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.

for example. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. you want to move the table closer to the wall. to lengthen the wall. click (Move). The table moves down. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . 23 Click next to the lower wall. click to specify the starting position. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. as shown. such as Move and Copy. In this case. and on the Tools toolbar. After selecting the element to move. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. Some commands. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.18 Click and drag the left control. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. and click again to specify the ending position.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. In this example. and click again to end it. and drag it on top of the table. or press CTRL+Z. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. on the Standard toolbar. such as the Lines command. 24 Select the plant. click the Undo command. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 On the Undo menu. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. select the second item in the list.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Some commands. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click Lines. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.

Press ESC twice. click Modify. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . On the Design Bar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.29 To end the command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

27 . Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Use detail components to define an assembly. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. or referenced as a drafting view. illustrating how building components work together. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. In this tutorial. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. and annotate building assemblies. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. In Revit Architecture. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. detail. but for training purposes. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. When you have finished these tutorials.

Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. for Name. click Drafting View. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. create a reference callout. scroll until the folder is displayed. you will create a drafting view. and reference a drafting view. If necessary. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 3 In the Scale list. import a DWG detail. enter Window Head Detail. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start.rvt. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.

dwg. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. as shown. located directly to the left of the drawing area. select Black and White. click Training Files.). Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.In the Project Browser. The drawing area is still blank. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . and click Open. The model zooms out. 6 In the Colors field list. displaying the extents of the detail. 9 Type ZR. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 10 In the drawing area. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.

and in the Scale list. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. to activate the view selection list. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown.The view displays to the specified area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. select Detail View: Detail. 13 Click Reference other view. in the Type Selector. click Callout. 14 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar.

Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . double-click the reference callout tag head. select Detail View: Detail.The reference callout is created. 3 In the drawing area. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. and in the Scale list. in the Type Selector. select Callout. c_express_workshop_details_start. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. adjust the detail view display settings. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt.

double-click Wall Base 1. 5 In the Rename View dialog. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. click Modify to clear the selection. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 4 Right-click Detail 0.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click OK. under Detail Views (Detail). enter Wall Base 1. under Detail Views(Detail). for Name. 6 In the drawing area.

Model-Based Detailing | 33 . This is the view crop region. bordered by a solid line.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.

and click View Properties. select As Underlay. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. right-click. 14 In the drawing area.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. and click OK. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. for Display Model. 16 Click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region).

Stud.Brick on Mtl. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Components. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . 21 Move the cursor up slightly. If the crop region is enlarged. on the Options Bar. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. By grouping detail components. 19 In the Type Selector. Directly above the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. and press ENTER. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. typical details can easily be placed. 20 In the drawing area. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. type 1' 6''. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 17 On the View Control Bar. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible.

22 Press ESC twice to end the command. click Modify to end the command. 25 In the Project Browser. 23 Using the same method. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and click Create Instance. add the following detail components as shown. as shown. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar.

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .4" Slab detail. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.28 Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.

or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. map keynotes by material. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. in the type selector. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. For more information about customizing a keynote database. and format keynote styles. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. c_express_workshop_details_start. or instructions within a construction documentation package. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. special notes. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. for Full Path. and Free End are selected. and verify that Horizontal. Leader. In the next exercise. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.rvt. click Browse. click Training Files. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and under Keynote Table. click Keynote ➤ Element.txt. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. You can customize this list. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.

If no value has been specified. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 8 Click to place the tag. Keynoting | 39 . Either move the text inside.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. or increase the size of the annotation crop region.5 In the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. 7 Click to place the leader arm. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. a question mark displays. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown.

draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 15 Select 07 21 00. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 16 In the drawing area.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Click to place the tag. and click OK.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. click Keynote ➤ Material. 14 In the Keynotes dialog.

and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information.Boxed. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 17 On the Options Bar. Click Check None. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Click OK. Only the keynotes remain selected.All items within the selection display in red. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. 19 In the Type Selector. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Select Keynote Tags. legends.

In this exercise. this tutorial uses imperial units only. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. but for training purposes. and modify and update the project sheet title block. Place views on drawing sheets. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. In this lesson. Add labels to a title block. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. update the project information element properties. you will create a sheet.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If necessary. In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). Project Sheet Layout | 43 . scroll until the folder is displayed. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. 3 Click OK. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In Revit Architecture. or in the element properties of the title block.

The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. you can enter ZE to zoom out. Smith and press ENTER. 6 In the Title Block. 7 Enter K. under Sheets(all). double-click Checker. enter Sections/Details. Then. roll the wheel. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block.Unnamed. To zoom in and out. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. hold down the wheel and drag. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Click OK. click Modify to clear the selection. In this tutorial. To pan.4 Type ZR. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. right-click A602 . enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. 5 In the drawing area. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. 8 On the Design Bar. enter A602. For Name. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number.

The Family Editor opens. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. enter Design Development. enter 4/10/2008. 16 Type ZR. 15 In the Options Bar. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . For Client Name. 20 Click and type Project Status. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. enter J. select Text : 1/8''. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. For Project Name. (Left) is selected. Smith. For Project Status.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. select the title block. 18 On the Options Bar. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. enter Freighthouse Flats. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. 17 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. in the Type Selector. 13 Click OK. click Text.

select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. click (Load into Project). 29 On the Design Bar. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. in the Type Selector. click Label. and click OK. add Project Issue Date parameter. under Category Parameters. click Modify to exit the command. and verify that (Top) are selected. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. and click. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 26 In the Edit Label dialog. as shown. 22 Using the same method. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 23 On the Design Bar.21 On the Design Bar. select Label : 3/16''. as shown. to add 28 Using the same method.

Project. and under Keynote Table. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. for Full Path. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. select Override parameter values of existing types. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. enter Keynote Legend . click Training Files. In this exercise. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. representing the view or schedule. and click Yes. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog.txt.30 In the Reload Family dialog. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. for Name. place and modify a keynote legend. a viewport displays. Next you will create. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. click Browse. to a drawing sheet.

under Text.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. and click OK. and drag Keynote Legend . expand Legends. clear Show Headers. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Sheets (all). Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser.Sections/Details. as shown. on the Appearance tab. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. double-click A601 . 8 In the Project Browser.

Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.Project as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . The keynote legend is visible.9 Press ESC to clear the selection.

enter Keynote Legend . the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display.Project. as shown. for Filter. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text.Sheet. and click OK. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. under Legends. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. for View Name. expand Detail Views (Detail). 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Properties. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. click Edit. The Keynote Legend is now blank. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Filter by sheet. at the bottom of the Filter tab.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 15 In the Project Browser. 19 Click OK twice. not keynotes. right-click Keynote Legend .

Title Sheet 1. double-click A0 . Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. under Sheets (all). you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area.The keynote legend is automatically updated. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. The view remains selected. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . and then add and update a Drawing list. as shown. The view title with line displays below the viewport.

Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. expand Schedules/Quantities. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. 5 In the Project Browser. The drawing list remains selected. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. as shown. or omit view titles from sheets. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. 6 Type ZR. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . As part of a construction document set.When you place a view on a sheet. and zoom in on the drawing list. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. by default. 3 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. Press ESC to clear the selection. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. Revit Architecture displays a view title. You can specify text attributes for view titles. define the information to include in a view title. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed.

Ceiling Plans. and click OK. including only sheets that contain views. clear Appears In Drawing List. right-click the selected sheets. The drawing list display is updated. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . while pressing SHIFT. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Properties.Sections/Details and select A801 . select A602 .

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

it is good practice to test the constraints. After the beginning exercises. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. For example. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. the wall or column will move with it. a central service core. a curtain wall. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. If the grid moves. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. As you develop the building design. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. 57 . As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software.

The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Browse. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. you design inside the elevation markers. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. East. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. but contains no geometry. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. construction. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. from the product library. notice four elevation markers. under Projects. 3 Under Template file. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. such as a door or window. you use a template that is provided with the software. select Project. with an RVT extension. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. and residential. The project is stored as a single file. verify that the second option is selected. you will use the default template.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. you load any required family type that is not in your project. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. For this project. The new project opens.rte. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Creating the Project In this exercise. In the drawing area in the right pane. West. views. click New. locate the Project Browser. levels. South. under Create new. In practice. click Training Files. 2 In the New Project dialog. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. and settings. and customize the project as necessary. In views that display elevation markers. 5 Click OK. To create the project file.

and delete them. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. and click Training Files. and elevation views created in the project by the template. Families. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. change their properties. 8 Under Floor Plans. the view you see in the drawing area. and duplicate levels. enter Revit Retail Building. NOTE If you create a project without a template. 14 For File name. content and building model reports. as well as change their names. and on the General tab. 16 Click Save. 15 For Save as type. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. double-click Metric. delete. As you design and document your building model. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. These views are customizable: you can rename them. verify that Project Files (*. and Elevations (Building Elevation). will be accessible from the Project Browser. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. sheets. notice the Legends. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. display in the south elevation. duplicate them. and families in your project. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. created by the template. Creating the Project | 59 . and other properties. double-click South. Sheets (all). then expand Floor Plans. such as schedules and legends. 7 If necessary. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). expand Views (all). Schedules/Quantities. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. you will want to save your work frequently. reflected ceiling plan views. view the Save reminder interval. 10 In the Project Browser. heights. Groups. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. You can add. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. 13 In the file window.rvt) is selected. schedules.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. Two level lines. Ceiling Plans.

17 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. so that when one level moves. Adding Project Levels on page 60. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. When you begin designing. After you modify the two default levels. doors. and windows within the building model. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. the other levels move and change with it. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. and double-click South. to each other. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. expand Views (all). and press ENTER. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You learn how the levels are locked. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. You change the names of the 2 default levels. or constrained. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 00 Foundation. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls.

view the Design Bar. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. and press ESC. not all the tabs are visible. Next. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. Adding Project Levels | 61 . The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. If it does not. enter -1800. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. When you add the new level. right-click. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 5 In the Project Browser. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. and click Basics. click Level. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. and press ENTER. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 14 Click Plan View Types. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 Enter 3750. and press ENTER. and then move it up. As you move the cursor. and click OK. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. This is the Options Bar. which should display by default. enter 0. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. enter 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. and press ENTER. By default. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. using a different option. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. and for Offset. 19 Click OK. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Next. and rename the corresponding views. enter 3750. or on the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 3. click Level. If you create a level by copying it. 21 In the Project Browser. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 26 Press ESC. and move it slightly upward. click (Pick Lines). 23 On the Options Bar. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. click Modify to end the command. and enter 02 Level. you add another level. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Rename. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level.18 In the Project Browser. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. 25 Click to place the level line. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view.

the levels are no longer constrained. and you can move them independently. Notice that by moving the top level. all the levels move. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Adding Project Levels | 63 . Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. If you select a level and click its lock. as shown. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line.

the column height changes as well. Move the cursor up. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. When the grid is complete. specify a start point for the grid line.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. In a later exercise. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 On the Options Bar. In the following exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. select (Draw). so that if the roof elevation changes. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. click Grid. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. On the Design Bar. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. and specify the grid line endpoint.

enter 7500 mm. On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click to place the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. click Grid.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and click to place the line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and click to place the line. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Next. click (Pick Lines). use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. enter 4500 mm. Enter A. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. for Offset. enter 7500 mm. and click to place the line. for Offset. and for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line.

10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. and specify the grid line endpoint. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. click Grid. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.8 Press ESC. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click Grid. On the Options Bar. as shown.

select grid lines C and 3. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 14 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click (Aligned). 18 On the Design Bar.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 22 While pressing CTRL. 15 Starting with grid line A. 21 Press ESC twice. click Dimension. Creating a Column Grid | 67 .

24 Press ESC. until it is closer to grid line A. click the value for Center Segment. and press ESC. click Modify. By pinning these central grid lines. click Edit/New. click . If necessary. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. 29 In the Name dialog. Two pins display on the grid lines. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. At the left endpoint of the grid line.5mm Bubble with Gap. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. click Modify. and select grid line A. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 32 Click OK twice. enter 6. 31 For End Segments Length. click Duplicate. until it is closer to grid line 5. (Element Properties). adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 50mm. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 30 In the Type Properties dialog.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 26 In the drawing area. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. select grid line 5. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. and select None. 33 On the Design Bar. The pins are hidden. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. and press ESC. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern.

click Finish. For Place By. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 35 In the Type Selector. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC. select all of the grid lines.5mm Bubble. and on the Options Bar. select Grid : 6. 39 In the Type Selector. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . select Grid : 6. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. The original continuous grid lines are restored. 36 On the Design Bar.5mm Bubble with Gap. and in the Type Selector. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 37 Select the grid lines again. click Modify. click Structural Column. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. click (Grid Intersection).34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines.

double-click 01 Entry Level.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. lock it. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. for From. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. click Camera. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 48 On the Standard toolbar. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. and unlock it. under Floor Plans. 52 On the Options Bar. Next. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 47 Enter 9000. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. If it is unlocked. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 43 Press ESC. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 45 While pressing CTRL. 46 On the Options Bar. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. and press ENTER. select 01 Entry Level. select grid line A. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click Activate Dimensions.

■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click to place the target point of the camera. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.

Right-click 3D View 1. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. named 3D View 1 by default. under Views (all). expand 3D Views. and click OK. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. In the Rename View dialog. The current view. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and then copy them to subsequent levels. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Beams In this exercise. displays in bold under 3D Views. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Beams on page 72. When you finish adding beams. enter To Building.

A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. the icon on the right side of the scale. under Floor Plans. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 9 On the Options Bar. select each grid line. double-click 01 Entry Level. 8 While pressing CTRL. Adding Beams | 73 . 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 7 On the Options Bar. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . The selected grid lines display as red.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. view the icons on the View Control Bar. click Beam. 4 Click Medium. click (Create Beam On Grid). 6 In the Type Selector. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click Finish. 10 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. under 3D Views.

NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. and click Select All Instances. double-click 01 Entry Level. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. press and hold SHIFT. and click OK. click Modify. click (Default 3D View). 17 In the Select Levels dialog. under Floor Plans.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. select 06 Roof. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 14 Select one of the beams. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View toolbar. right-click. select 02 Level.

19 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. under Constraints.to the 5th level. 22 On the Options Bar. right-click. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 25 In the Project Browser. click 24 Press ESC. and click OK. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. select 06 Roof. 21 With the column selected. When you created the columns. resize the view to see the entire structure. (Element Properties). 20 Click Cancel. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. under 3D Views. double-click To Building. view the Top Level parameter. for Top Level. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Select All Instances. 06 Roof. and if necessary. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. All of the columns display as red. Adding Beams | 75 . right-click. and click Element Properties.

76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under Elevations. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. double-click South. 28 Save the drawing. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. but you want to display them in less detail. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. as lines only.

Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you create 8 framing elevation views. and press ESC to end the command. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. To better add the braces to the structure. 3 On the Options Bar. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces | 77 . double-click 00 Foundation. Adding Braces In this exercise.29 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. click Framing Elevation. Adding Braces on page 77.

verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. The associated framing elevation view displays.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). NOTE Do not copy or array braces. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. click Brace. but when placed the braces are placed. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. double-click the elevation marker arrow. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 7 On the Design Bar. press ESC twice. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. and when the endpoint snap displays. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. click to specify the start point of the brace. After you add the final brace. 8 In the Type Selector. 11 Using the same technique.

delete it and redraw it. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. The height of the roof lowers. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. and press ENTER.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Adding Braces | 79 . enter 18000 mm.

17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. enter 10000 mm. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. and press ENTER. 14 On the Standard toolbar. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. but this time add them from right to left. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights.

19 In the Project Browser. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. Adding Braces | 81 . 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). and on the Options Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. enter 12000 mm. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 21 Select grid line A. click Activate Dimensions. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. NOTE As you add braces. and press ENTER.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. as shown in the 3D view below.

(Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. Creating a Foundation on page 82. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . beams. 29 In the Project Browser. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 31 Save the drawing. Test connectivity of the columns. under 3D Views. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. click and roof height. lock it. under Elevations. grid size. under Floor Plans. and if necessary. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. double-click {3D}.24 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and drag it away from the structure. 28 On the Standard toolbar.

double-click 00 Foundation. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Before you can add the pile caps. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. After you load the pile cap family. and click View Properties. and press ESC twice. click Training Files. under Extents. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. under View Depth. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. 9 Close the warning dialog. and expand Structural Foundations. Click OK twice. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. A warning displays.rfa. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). and drag it to the drawing area. The foundation pile cap now displays. expand Families. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. and how to load specific families into a project. for Level. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. select Unlimited. under Floor Plans. click Edit. for View Range. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. In the Element Properties dialog. In the View Range dialog. The pile cap has been added in the view. Creating a Foundation | 83 .

When the final pile cap is placed.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. and click Create Similar. press ESC twice.

All columns in the building model display as red. 2 Select one of the columns. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. right-click. click Training Files. double-click {3D}. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. you change the types of the columns. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. under 3D Views. beam. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. and click Select All Instances. beams. You load new column. and brace families into the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 .14 Close the file with or without saving it. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise.

and changing its size parameter. and click Select All Instances. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. select the braces in the elevation one by one. for d. click Brace. The brace type changes. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. enter 75mm. In the following steps. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.3 In the Type Selector.9. the braces as well as the beams change. click Modify.2X101. right-click. select M_Round Bar: 75mm.5CHS. 17 While pressing CTRL. 15 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. you change the brace type. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 18 In the Type Selector. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .6X15. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. 6 In the Type Selector. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. double-click Elevation 1-a. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. under Dimensions. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. click (Element Properties). 13 In the Name dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. click Duplicate. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. The building model displays the round hollow columns. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 9 In the Type Selector. enter 75mm. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. for Type. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). but it is the only size of its type currently available. 10 On the Options Bar. This not the size that you want to use.

and click Open. select m_RRB_structure_complete. After the files are linked.rvt. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. select Auto . click Training Files. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. 3 Under Positioning. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin.

5 On the Tools toolbar. depending on the project. After the link is established. Grids. while pressing CTRL. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. In this case. 6 In the drawing area. structural members. click (Copy/Monitor). You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change.4 In the Project Browser. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. double-click South. select the linked Revit model. and walls could also be copy/monitored. click Copy. and click Select Link. select Multiple. select Levels 00 through 06. under Elevations. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . however. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 In the drawing area.

for Floor Plan views. First. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . click Finish mode. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Delete. right-click Level 1. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser.10 On the Options Bar. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. click Finish. delete the Level 2 floor plan. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). 18 Using the same method. 16 Click OK. click OK. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. while pressing SHIFT. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information.

right-click. 26 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. and click OK. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the Topography : Surface. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. click OK. 20 In the drawing area. for Name. right-click.19 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plans. 25 In the View Templates dialog.

adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. and click OK.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. double-click Site. click Camera. under Names. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 34 In the 3D view that displays. select Floor Plans. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . 33 Click at the upper left of the grid.

enter To Building. stairs. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. right-click 3D View 1. In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Floors on page 92. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. Adding Floors In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as roofs. Some other Revit Architecture elements.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. To create floors. and click OK. and click Rename. 36 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and railings are also created from sketches. expand 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.35 In the Project Browser.

sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. Adding Floors | 93 . 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Do not lock the dimension. and elements in the current view display as gray. At the top left corner of the grid. select the top floor line. click Lines. Move the cursor to the left. On the Sketch tab. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. and then the first horizontal grid line.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. click Floor. Leave this dimension unlocked. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. under Floor Plans. past the first vertical grid line. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. You are now in the Sketch Editor. If the grid changes size. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. click (Rectangle). double-click 01 Entry Level. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps.

5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. click Modify. Enter 300. and then press ESC. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Move the cursor to the left dimension. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. select the top floor line. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. and change their values to 300 mm. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ 7 On the Design Bar. At the top left corner of the grid. press ENTER. They display on the floor sketch. and click the temporary dimension value. Select and lock the dimensions. Do not lock the dimensions.

using a different sketching technique. click (Pick Lines). double-click 02 Level. On the Sketch tab. under Floor Plans. Select the three remaining floor lines. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. click Lines. Adding Floors | 95 . Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. Next. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. and for Offset. and on the Options Bar. click Quit Sketch. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. on the Design Bar.8 Select the floor. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. enter 1500mm. click Edit. and lock the dimensions. and press ESC. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. click Floor.

Click the locks to constrain the floors. click (Align). 16 On the Design Bar. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. click Lines.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. double-click 03 Level. 14 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). click Floor. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 17 On the Sketch tab. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. The 02 Level floor displays. and a lock icon displays. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans.

double-click {3D}. under Views ➤ 3D Views. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and lock the edges. 32 Select the floor. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Finish Sketch. click Edit. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. Alternatively. 31 In the Project Browser.24 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. click Finish Sketch. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. Adding Floors | 97 . select 05 Roof Garden. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 35 On the Sketch tab. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 06 Roof. click Lines. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. click to place the roof line. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. and press ENTER. click Training Files. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. Adding a Roof on page 98. When a blue dashed line displays. To create the roof. Click (Pick Lines). You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. enter 1800 mm.rvt. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ For Offset.

move the cursor slightly below the grid line. click to place the roof line.6 Select grid line 5. and when the blue dashed line displays. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). Adding a Roof | 99 . for Offset. enter 300 mm. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left).

and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). ■ 12 On the Design Bar. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. select the roof.10 Press ESC. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. click Finish Roof.

click Modify. on grid D. 15 On the Options Bar. for Elevation. move the cursor down below the roof. and press ENTER. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter -100 mm. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. click Section. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. 17 On the Design Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. click (Add new points to the slab shape).14 On the Options Bar. Adding a Roof | 101 . and click to specify the section.

29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 30 Click OK 3 times. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. double-click 06 Roof. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. select the roof. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.20 On the Design Bar. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. click Edit/New. select Variable. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. for Structure [1]. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. for Structure. In section. under Construction. click Edit. 24 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties). 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

and press DELETE. click (Default 3D View). 33 In the warning dialog. In this case. click Modify.Roof Edge. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 40 In the Type Selector. 38 In the 3D view. Adding a Roof | 103 . select each edge. moving counter-clockwise. on the View Control Bar. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.31 On the Design Bar. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. 41 Starting with the left front edge. zoom in to the roof. select the section line. click OK. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 37 If necessary. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. select Fascia : Fascia .

you add a curtain wall. click Modify. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so if you resize the grid. under 3D Views. the curtain wall resizes with it. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.42 On the Design Bar. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise.

7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. for Spacing. enter 600 mm. click Edit/New. and move it slightly toward the building interior. select 05 Roof Garden. When you duplicate a type. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. for Join Condition. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. The type is saved in the project. For Offset. and click OK. enter 2100 mm. select 01 Entry Level. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click to place the first curtain wall segment. For Height. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. for Type. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. enter 1050 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. click Duplicate. For Level. for Spacing. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).rvt. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. 6 In the Name dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK twice. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. click 01 Entry Level. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . Under Construction. enter Retail Storefront. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 3 In the Type Selector.

click (Trim/Extend). under 3D Views. double-click To Building. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. you can delete the dimensions. If you want to hide them. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. so they remain in the view. and lock the dimensions. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. If the grid moves. click Dimension. These dimensions are not in a sketch. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. and trim each curtain wall segment.

Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance | 107 . You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance on page 107. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. Do not select Columns.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. clear one element to clear all the elements. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 Under Visibility. click All. and double-click South. 6 Under Visibility. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. as these usually represent internal pilasters. and click None. All the elements in the list are selected. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 7 Click OK. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 4 On the Model Categories tab. under the element list. To better work with the curtain wall panels. under Views (all). click Detail Level ➤ Medium.

9 On the Design Bar. select System Panel : Solid. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 12 With the panels selected. 10 Select 1 panel. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify. under 3D Views. 16 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. double-click {3D}. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. select Architectural Elevation. in this case an architectural elevation. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. press and hold CTRL. in the Type Selector. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. and click OK. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 17 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 109 . and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 18 On the View Control Bar. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.

19 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Zoom to the front of the building. under 3D Views. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 20 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.

25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. click Add or Remove Segments. click Curtain Grid. Creating an Entrance | 111 .23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and click to select it. select another mullion to the right. select One Segment. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). and unpin it. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 32 In the Type Selector.

34 On the View toolbar. and view the new entrance. click (Default 3D View).33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. select it. press TAB until it is selected. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. and unpin it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building.

and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 3rd. 39 Using the same process. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise.38 Press DELETE. and 4th panels. open the North elevation. 40 Optionally. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. remove the mullions from the 2nd.

2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. 5 Click OK.rvt. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. 3 Right-click in the view. double-click 01 Entry Level. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select 02 Level. under Graphics. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. for Underlay. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

10 In the Rename View dialog. enter Display Area. which indicates you must draw the callout. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 8 Select the callout.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. and click to complete the callout. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. select the grip closest to the callout head. click Callout. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. The cursor changes to a pencil.

12 Draw a section line.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select the section line. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. right-click. as shown. click Section. and click Flip Section. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 16 Select the section box. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 14 Press ESC.

■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 21 In the Type Selector. expand Sections (Building Section). Click (Rectangle). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 24 On the Tools toolbar.17 In the Project Browser. for Prefer. 26 On the Design Bar. select Wall faces. right-click Section 1. click Dimension. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. select Finish Face: Exterior. click (Align). select Basic Wall : Interior . For Loc Line. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . enter Section Display Area. and click Rename.135mm Partition (2-hr). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Lock both alignments. double-click 01 Entry Level. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. 25 Press ESC twice. 27 On the Options Bar. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. under Floor Plans. click Wall.

) 36 Press ESC twice. double-click Section Display Area. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 38 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. Next. 37 In the Project Browser. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and lock the dimension. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. under Ceiling Plans. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. double-click 01 Entry Level. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Ceiling. and lock the dimension. under Sections (Building Section). 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 32 In the Type Selector.

double-click 01 Entry Level. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the walls. 46 Press ESC. under Constraints. for Height Offset From Level. click Modify. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. and click to select the walls. double-click Section Display Area. for Top/Base. for Base Offset. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . click to select it. enter 2700 mm. under Ceiling Plans. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 41 On the Options Bar. Select the 02 Level Floor. click (Element Properties). click Attach. and press ESC. 47 In the Project Browser. 43 On the Design Bar.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. under Sections. and click (Element Properties). press TAB until you select the wall chain. and click OK. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. under Constraints.

click Edit. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. under Construction. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. under Ceiling Plans. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click Cancel. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . view the ceiling structure. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 54 Click OK. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. and click . 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click (Rotate). click Cancel. 58 On the Edit toolbar. for Structure. double-click 01 Entry Level.49 In the Project Browser.

60 Click. enter 45. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 61 Press ESC. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . and press ENTER.

67 Proceed to the next exercise. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 64 On the View Control Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. double-click To Building. 66 Optionally. click Shadows Off. under 3D Views. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows On.

double-click 01 Entry Level. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. and copy it to the 05 Level. and click to create a reference plane to the right. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and for Offset. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to create a reference plane to the left. enter 1500 mm.rvt. Move the cursor over grid line B. click Ref Plane. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . 3 On the Options Bar.

and 3. click Modify. 2. 7 Using the same method. C. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and specify a point to create first stair flight. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. shorten the right reference plane. click Stairs.5 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. 6 Select the left reference plane. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B.

12 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. Click (Rectangle). click Wall. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. beyond the end of the stair. select Basic Wall : Generic . and select the 2nd reference plane. and specify a point. including its handrails. The complete stair displays. Move the cursor down. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. select Finish Face: Interior.225mm Masonry.

15 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select it. enter 1200 mm. 18 Using the same technique. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Select the bottom of the stair. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Align. Click Modify. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. and lock the alignment. select the dimension value. click Dimension. Lock the dimension. select Wall faces. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the wall. for Prefer. and specify a point away from the wall. Select the interior face of the wall.

(Undo). 24 On the Standard toolbar. clear Tag on Placement. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. click Door. 28 On the Options Bar. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. a warning displays. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. and press DELETE. and press DELETE. TIP To flip the door swing. Because the dimension is constrained. The stair and walls move to the left. 25 While pressing CTRL. 23 Select the stair. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. select both reference planes. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 27 In the Type Selector.21 Select the dimension.

double-click 01 Entry Level. select 05 Roof Garden. 33 Select the stair. click 36 On the View toolbar. (Element Properties). ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. (Default 3D View). For Top Constraint. and move the cursor to spin the building model. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). click Modify. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. Under Constraints. select 00 Foundation. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. 35 On the View toolbar. 44 On the Tools toolbar. (SteeringWheels). You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. Click OK. for Multistory Top Level. click Align. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. Click OK.30 On the Design Bar. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). (Rectangle). 40 Zoom in to the stairs. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. select all 4 walls. under Floor Plans. but if you view the top level of the building. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. for Base Constraint.

and lock the alignment. click (Default 3D View). View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. and lock the alignments. on the View toolbar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. click see the roof. (SteeringWheels).46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls.

By offsetting the base. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. for Base Offset. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under Floor Plans. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 56 Select the shaft. Under Constraints. (SteeringWheels). (Default 3D View).55 In the Project Browser. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. For Top Constraint. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 59 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. double-click 01 Entry Level. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. enter 300 mm. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches.

select 06 Roof.rvt. 2 Right-click in the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Graphics.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. click Training Files. and click OK. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. and click View Properties. for Underlay.

The exact placement is not important. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. click Remove Constraints. click Lines. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Basic Wall : Generic . 16 On the Design Bar. click . 11 In the Go To View dialog. and on the Options Bar. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. and press ENTER. click (Align). 17 On the Options Bar. enter 9750. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. and click (Fillet arc). 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall.225mm Masonry. and click Open View. click Edit Profile. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. select Elevation: South. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the right face of the wall.5 In the Type Selector. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 15 In the error dialog.

18 In the upper right corner of the profile. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. and click (Circle). select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . click . 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. double-click {3D}. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner.

24 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden.

5 On the Basics tab. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . click Component. as shown. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. double-click 05 Roof Garden.5 Meters. TIP After you place the 1st planter. select M_RPC Tree . click Training Files. click Component.rvt.4. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. and press ESC twice. 3 In the Type Selector. between grid lines C and D. 6 In the Type Selector. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Type Properties dialog.8 On the View toolbar. 18 In the Project Browser.5 Meters. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. select the 2 remaining trees. (Element Properties). enter Japanese Cherry 1.5 Meters. and click OK. View the roof.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 17 While pressing CTRL. for Type. and then click OK twice. select M_RPC Tree . enter 2400 mm. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit/New. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Name dialog. For Offset. as shown. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. click Floor. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). under Dimensions. 11 Select one of the trees. under 3D Views. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and in the Type Selector. click Duplicate. double-click {3D}. click (Default 3D View). enter 1500 mm. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. for Height. 16 Click Apply.

25 Using the same method. and click to place the line. click (Draw). 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to sketch a line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. for Offset. enter 0 mm. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 26 On the Options Bar. and click to sketch a line. 29 On the Options Bar. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5.

37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. click (Trim/Extend). and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 32 Press ESC. and click to finish the line. clear Chain. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. move the cursor up 900 mm. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm.30 On the Options Bar. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line.

RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. under Constraints. 39 Select the sidewalk. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 43 Click OK twice. and click so he is facing the column. When you render an image. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. In plan view. 49 On the Options Bar. click Component. 48 In the Type Selector. 45 Click OK. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . a photorealistic image displays. click Duplicate.38 On the Design Bar. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. enter -250 mm. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Sidewalk. click Finish Sketch. select M_RPC Male : Alex. 42 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. for Height Offset from Level. click Edit/New. for Type. select Rotate after placement. The completed sidewalk displays. near Column E5. as shown: (Element Properties). 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. Next.

55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click the car. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. about 30 degrees. 56 Press ESC twice. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. and click to place her on the sidewalk. select M_RPC Beetle. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 54 In the Type Selector. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. click Camera. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1).NOTE If necessary. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. and click (Element Properties). 52 In the Type Selector.

under 3D Views. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. Next. for Offset. and on the Options Bar. enter -300 mm. under Elevations. under Constraints. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. double-click West. 64 Select Alex. 63 Click the sidewalk. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . and on the Options Bar. click Pick Host. 60 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click To Building. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. 66 Using the same method. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. When you select a host for a component. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. If the sidewalk changes height. 65 Click the sidewalk.59 In the Element Properties dialog. click Pick Host.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. After the service core is positioned. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. and replace them with a service core. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building.

double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. 3 Select the entire stairwell. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. click 6 On the View toolbar. 5 On the View toolbar.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. walls. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 4 Press DELETE. including the stairs.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). you delete the entire stairwell. and shaft opening. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 .

under Floor Plans. expand Model. click Modify. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt. click Training Files. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. double-click 00 Foundation. and notice that the linked file is listed. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. right-click m_RRB_core. click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. click (Align). 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. expand Groups. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. 13 In the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. and zoom in to the linked instance. and open Metric\m_RRB_core.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and on the Design Bar.

16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. click Modify. click 21 On the View toolbar. 18 Select the core. ■ ■ Click grid line C. and click to align the center. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. or if the group layout is expected to change. and on the Options Bar. click Ungroup. (SteeringWheels). click (top down view). Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. click Training Files. After you modify it. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. where it is hosted within a railing family.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. you add glass railings around the floor edges.rvt. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and select Glass.rvt. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. press and hold CTRL. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. 8 In the Project Browser.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click OK. The rendering displays. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. and expand Railings. click (Split). and open Metric\m_Conference. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C.rvt. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click Edit. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. expand Families. under Floor Plans. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. and double-click Lounge Perspective. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. click Training Files. The floor sketch displays. in the Project Browser. 5 Expand Railing. and click to split the floor. Handrail only. and Parapet. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and on the Options Bar. 3 In the Conference project. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. double-click 02 Level. expand Renderings.

and click to draw another line. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 23 Complete the sketch as shown.15 On the Design Bar. verify that Chain is not selected. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. and click to place it. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and on the Options Bar. 25 Select grid line B. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click to draw another line. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 24 On the Tools toolbar. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Lines. 18 On the Design Bar. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click Modify. click (Align). 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch.

33 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. click Railing Properties. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing. 29 On the Design Bar. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 100 mm. 30 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click OK. click (Align). select Glass. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Dimension. 31 In the Revit dialog. For Offset. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . for Type. Lock the dimensions. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown.rvt project. and lock the alignment.26 Select grid line D. click Finish Sketch. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown.

39 Click Finish Sketch. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Dimension. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .37 On the Design Bar.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

We wish to thank BNIM Architects. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. and a roof garden. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. balconies. exterior fire stairs. NOTE For training purposes. 153 . a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. lofty ceilings. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. slight modifications to the building design have been made.

154 .

including plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 155 . You learn how to create new views from existing views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model. elevation. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. section. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. how to create section and elevation views.

rvt. expand Floor Plans.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 7 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select Level 2. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser.

Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. click the current scale. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. and click 1: 1000. 11 Under Floor Plans. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 14 On the View Control Bar. enter Vicinity Plan. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Next.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 16 Right-click.rvt. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. under Floor Plans. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale.rvt. click Elevation. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. double-click Level 1. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

and double-click Level 1. enter South East. 15 On the Options Bar. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. click Section. select Section: Building Section. 10 In the Rename View dialog. expand Floor Plans. under Elevations. and click OK. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor down. double-click South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select 1:100. under Views (all). right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. for Scale. 11 In the Project Browser.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. click Modify. expand Sections (Building Section). click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.21 On the Design Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 24 Select gridline F. and double-click Section 1. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . using the blue circular drag grip. 23 On the View Control Bar.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. To create each view.25 On the Design Bar.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Creating Callout Views | 167 . under Floor Plans.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click Level 1. select 1:50.Resulting callout view . for Scale. select Floor Plan. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. click Callout. 4 On the Options Bar.

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and select the callout boundary. click Modify.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ Select the middle grip. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.

double-click Section 1. select Detail View: Detail. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select 1:50. 13 In the Type Selector. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 9 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Building Sections). click Modify.7 On the Design Bar. for Scale. Creating Callout Views | 169 . and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. click Callout. enter Enlarged Stair Plan.

and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

17 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. expand Detail Views (Details). and click OK. Creating Callout Views | 171 . enter Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.

select Custom-Section Head. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.rfa.rvt. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. You change the appearance of the section mark head. open Metric\Families\Annotations. the elevation markers. double-click Level 1.

5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 12. and click OK twice. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and can be applied to the section line. click Load into Project. select the current project. and click OK. select the section line. Section Tail . 17 Under Category. 15 Under Category. scroll to Section Marks. 10 On the floor plan. clear any others. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and select 2. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. click Edit/New. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. and select 3.Filled. 12 For Section Tag. . scroll to Section Line. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Section Head .Custom. Section Tail – Filled. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. click Duplicate.5mm Square. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. On the floor plan. and click OK. for Section Head. 19 Click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 22 In the Name dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. click Duplicate. and click OK.

For Dimensions ➤ Width. and click OK. select 12. 39 Click OK twice. On the floor plan.5 mm.rfa. Click OK. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog.23 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. click Edit/New. clear all others. enter 12. and on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. for Elevation Tag. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select the current project. 34 In the Name dialog. For Line Weight. select Custom-Callout Head. select the callout. click Training Files. click Edit/New. 30 On the Design Bar. 36 In the drawing. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 Press ESC. and on the Options Bar. for Callout Tag. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 38 In the Type Properties dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display.5mm Square. click Load into Project. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. For Corner Radius. select 3. Click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. . select Square. and click Open. . enter 6 mm. 27 Click OK twice.

44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and visual overrides. 46 Under Category.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. filters. masking regions. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 49 Click OK. select Dash. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . 47 Select Callout Leader Line. expand Callout Boundary. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 43 Under Category. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click the Annotation Objects tab. 45 For Line Pattern. view regions. You learn to create view templates. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and select 4. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and select 7.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. click Zoom to Fit. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings.Creating a View Template In this exercise. The crop region displays as red. click (Hide Crop Region). and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 2 On the View Control Bar. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the View Control Bar. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. To accomplish this.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 6 On the View Toolbar. click (Show Crop Region). and double-click East. click Training Files. under Elevations. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.

Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. Callouts. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 Under Visibility. and section lines are now hidden in the view. Creating a View Template | 177 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. clear Entourage. under Visibility. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. elevation markers. grids. 13 On the View Control bar. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. levels. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

click OK. 15 In the New View Template dialog. right-click North. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. and click OK. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 20 Using the same method.rvt. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 17 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click Create View Template From View. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. double-click North. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. under Elevations. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.14 In the Project Browser. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. edit the crop region as before. click Apply. and click OK. under Elevations. right-click East.

select Level Below (Level 4).View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . under Extents. select Level Below (Level 4). and the exterior area on the south side of the building. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Under View Depth. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. double-click Penthouse. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. for Bottom. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. right-click. under Floor Plans. for View Range. and click Properties.rvt. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Level. select Penthouse. click Edit.

Click OK twice. under Extents. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level 4. for Level. 6 In the Project Browser. select Roof Plan.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. for Bottom. click Edit. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. Under View Depth. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. for View Range. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Roof Plan. select Level 4.

click Finish Sketch. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). for Level. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Region Properties.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Under View Depth. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. select Unlimited. for View Range. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . Click OK twice. for Bottom. click Plan Region. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left corner of the building. 13 On the Design Bar. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 16 On the Design Bar. click Edit. select Unlimited. click Lines. under Extents.

expand Floor Plans. After you apply the filter. in this case. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. and double-click Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Filters tab.17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Views (all). the fire rating of the walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.rvt.

17 Using the same method. 11 Select Rated Walls. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. for Pattern. 16 Click OK. click <No Override>. click Override under Patterns. Select contains. 7 In the Filters dialog. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 5 In the Filters dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select the red color. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Color. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. click OK. for Rated Walls. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . and apply a color. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. click Edit/New. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 10 On the Filter tab. 9 Click OK. and click OK. select Fire Rating. and click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Categories. select Walls. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click Add. click Remove. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. Enter Hr. and click OK. under Basic colors. click (New). 14 In the Color dialog. select Solid Fill. under Projection/Surface. under Filters. enter Rated Walls.

you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

9 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 7 On the View menu. and click OK. 4 On the View Control Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 8 Select the crop region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Show Crop Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. as shown.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Invisible lines. 11 In the Type Selector. and click Rename. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. click Masking Region.

13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle). 14 On the Design Bar.12 On the Options Bar. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Finish Sketch. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Level 1. click the current scale. for Pattern. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 7 Under Cut. under Pattern Overrides. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Walls. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Visibility. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. and click Override. and click OK. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click in the Patterns field. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Rename. for Color. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. under Floor Plans. right-click. 11 Click OK twice. and click OK. right-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click 1: 50. click <No Override> to apply a color. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click black. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Solid fill. 4 On the View Control Bar. right-click.

clear Floors. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. 16 Under Visibility. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Grids. click Modify.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar.

Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click.

27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. right-click. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice. By using the previous method to make the selection. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click OK. click <No Override> to apply a color. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default.20 Right-click. select the sofa. click Projection Lines. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 23 In the Color dialog. click a purple color. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 21 Under Projection/Surface. click Override. for Color. for Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. under Lines. select Dash.

select a bright green color. click Modify.28 For Color. 32 Select one of the lamps. click By Category Override. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 29 In the Color dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . click . right-click. and click OK twice. 30 On the Design Bar.

Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise.33 On the View Control Bar. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.

The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. and click View. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select A0 metric. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. click Training Files.Creating Sheets. and click OK. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 .

8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. Click OK. enter Site Plan.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. on the Options Bar. click Modify. For Sheet Number. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties).Unnamed. enter A101. 3 In the Project Browser. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. expand Sheets (all). 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 When the title block highlights. click Modify. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . and select the title block.

Smith. The new project information displays in the titleblock. For Project Number. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. enter J. enter Freighthouse Flats. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. click Edit. for Project Address. For Project Status. 14 Click OK. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Name. under Other. 2009.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter 15 May. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . enter For Approval. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2009-1. MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Client Name.

Layout Plan A104 . and click OK. you add views to these sheets.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Sections A108 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. for Name. select A0 metric. and click Save. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Elevations A107 .rvt.Elevations A106 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Floor Plan.Stairs In the following exercise. and click Rename. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click. select the new sheet name.Elevations A105 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . and click OK.

6 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. select Level 1.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. The red border around the view no longer displays. under Sheets (all). double-click A102 . 4 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). and drag it to the sheet. double-click A104 . Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place the view.Floor Plan.Elevations.rvt. under Elevations (Building Elevation). The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser.

8 On the Design Bar. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. click Modify. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click A107 . align it with the East elevation. and click to place it.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.Sections. click Modify. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and on the Options Bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. zoom in to the grip.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. . 16 Select title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. for View Scale. and click OK. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. select 1:5. and press TAB until it highlights. move the cursor over it.

double-click A108 . 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Stairs. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. and click to place it. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 18 Under Floor Plans. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.

and then make changes and deactivate the view. In order to do this. 2 Select the building section view. 5 On the Design Bar. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click A107 . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. and press ENTER. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . and click Activate View. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you must first activate the view on the sheet. click Modify. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. enter 16700 mm. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. right-click. under Sheets (all).Sections.

You modify the view to hide the view title. After you create the sheet. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 7 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation).6 Right-click. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. double-click North.rvt. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Deactivate View. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.

select A0 metric. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The camera view displays.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . 7 Place the camera as shown. select the new sheet name. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. and click OK. Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. enter T. and click Properties. click Camera. right-click. double-click Level 1. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.

under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. enter 100000 mm. 12 On the View Control Bar. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. Under Camera. double-click T . enter 18000 mm. For Far Clip Offset. 13 In the Project Browser. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 11 On the View Control Bar. for Eye Elevation. For Target Elevation. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select Far Clip Active. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Under Extents. enter 1500 mm.8 On the Options Bar. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. Click OK. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 14 Under 3D Views.

and click OK. click Size. click Edit/New. Click Apply. 25 On the Design Bar. . click Duplicate. click Modify. enter Viewport/no title mark. under Graphics. select Scale (locked proportions). click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 635 mm. select No. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 24 Click OK twice. on the Options Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 21 In the Type Properties dialog.15 With the view selected. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 22 In the Name dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. and on the Options Bar. for Height. click Modify. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. for Show title. Under Model Crop Size. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file.

rvt. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. such as room and window schedules. such as doors and windows.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Because of the open style floor plan.Level 1. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Tagging Objects In this lesson. expand Floor Plans. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. 207 . You also learn to create different types of schedules. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects.

3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Room and Area. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. move the cursor to the right. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. as shown: 5 Using the same method. click Room Separation.

9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 7 On the Design Bar.6 Using the same method. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . click Load. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

and press ENTER. click it. 14 For Offset. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and the rectangle contains the room tag. verify that Tag on placement is selected. indicating that it can be edited. 13 On the Options Bar. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and select the room tag. click Room. 11 In the Tags dialog. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Training Files. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. click OK. type U18-1. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the room and tag. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. The room tag number displays in blue. type 2400 mm.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa.

22 Click the room text label. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Room. click Modify. type Kitchen. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 23 Using the same method. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . ■ 21 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.18 Click the room text label. Click to place the new room and tag. and press ENTER. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. type Entry. Sequential letters are also supported. 19 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Dining. click Modify. place rooms and tags.

under Floor Plans. 27 On the Design Bar. clear Room Separation. The rooms are already placed.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and moving clockwise. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). expand Lines. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Tag. 29 On the Design Bar. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. click Modify. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. on the Model Categories tab. but they need to be tagged. and click OK.

Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. clear Leader.Level 1. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you learn how to place door and window tags. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.rvt. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . in the Project Browser.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

type Storage. type Building Entry.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 102. select Corridor. For 104. select Storage. and press ENTER. 101-106. For 105. For 103. add 5 more rooms. next to Rows. click New. for Name. for room 101. type Corridor. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. The room Number is U17-46. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially.

place rooms from a program list. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 4 Click OK twice. under Projection/Surface. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. In the Line Graphics dialog. click the Lines field. 13 Save the file. click the Color field. In the Lines field. click Override. under Visibility.■ For 106. double-click Level 1. you add room separation lines. For Weight. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. expand Lines. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. type Stair. For Room Separation. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click the bright green swatch. and click OK. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and modify room names. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select 9. Under Custom colors.

click Room. First. click Modify. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. draw the horizontal line. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 9 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . click Room Separation.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.

type 2400 mm. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). select 101 Building Entry. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 For Offset. for Room. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage. 13 On the Options Bar.

and zoom in to the Corridor. under Schedules/Quantities. click Modify.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 16 Using the same method. 20 While pressing CTRL. under Floor Plans. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 19 In the Project Browser. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 17 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). place the following rooms. double-click Room Schedule. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.

and click OK. for Rows. 27 Select Schedule keys. Floor Finish. under Constraints. select Rooms. click 23 On the Design Bar. type As Selected. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 Open the Room Schedule. 31 For Key Name. type Units. click Schedule/Quantities. (Element Properties). 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click New. and click OK. and for all 3 finishes. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Category. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 30 On the Options Bar. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify.21 On the Options Bar. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. clear Room Bounding. and Wall Finish. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. select Base Finish. under Available fields. and click Add. while pressing CTRL.

and click OK. select Units. click Edit. 44 On the Options Bar. click Check None. for Room Style. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. for Available fields. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. and click Properties.32 Using the same method. under Identity Data. 42 On the Options Bar. under Other. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 38 Under U17-8. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. double-click Level 1. 33 In the Project Browser. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Rooms. for Room Style. and click Add. select Units. under Schedules/Quantities. 36 Click OK twice. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Room Schedule. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. for Fields. select Room Style. click (Filter Selection). 43 In the Filter dialog. 37 Open the Room Schedule.

you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). under Views (all). expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click the Color Scheme field. select Public. click OK. under Graphics. and apply it to the Level 1 view. select Room Style.46 Open the Room Schedule. click 5 For Title. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Color. select Service. and click Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 103. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. and double-click Level 1. and 106. type Room Type. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. for Name. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. click OK. (Duplicate). The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. under Floor Plans. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. type Room Type. 104. 4 In the New color scheme dialog.rvt. at the warning prompt. right-click Level 1. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 48 Save the file. 9 In the Project Browser. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. For rooms 102 and 105.

click Color Scheme Legend. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). under Schemes. and click OK. under Visibility. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click the value in the Color column. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . and clear Room Separation. select Room Type. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select the color legend. 17 On the Design Bar. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. expand Lines. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click Edit. clear Visible. click Edit Color Scheme. 14 Click OK twice. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

click Modify. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. type 25 mm. 23 Using the same method. type 5 mm. under Custom color. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. 30 On the Design Bar. respectively. for Size. for Swatch Width. and click OK. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select blue. under Graphics. on the Options Bar. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 Under Title Text. 29 Click OK twice.22 In the Color dialog. (Element Properties).

under Sections. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click Building Section.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. under Visibility. under Graphics. 35 Click OK twice. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. under Sections. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. click Edit. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. and click OK. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. click Color Scheme Legend. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. select Room Type. and select Properties. for Color Scheme. select Rooms. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. right-click Building Section.

under Identity Data. and click OK. select Public. under Identity Data. select all the rooms in the stairwell. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and click OK. (Filter Selection).40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 45 While pressing CTRL. for Room Style. for Room Style. select Units. 42 In the Filter dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 41 On the Options Bar. click Check None. 46 Click .

51 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . and click OK. select Service. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. and click . excluding the stairwell spaces. for Rows. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. type Suites.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. double-click Room Style Schedule. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. for Room Style. click New. under Key Name for the new row. under Schedules/Quantities. 54 While pressing CTRL. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 In the Room Style Schedule.

55 Click . 59 Under Room Area Computation. but not beyond it. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. select Suites. under Identity Data. select the room on the left side of the top floor. The color fill will extend to the roof. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. under Volume Computations. and click OK. verify that At wall finish is selected. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. select Areas and Volumes. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. for Room Style. The color fill extends to the roof. and click OK. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor.

and the living room.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. type 0. select Loft. for Upper Limit. 70 For Limit Offset. 72 On the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . click Modify. 68 Click . and click 65 For Limit Offset. 67 On the first level. under Constraints. under Constraints. select the stairwell room. . 69 In the Element Properties dialog. the dining room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. type -254 mm. 71 Click OK.0. 66 Click OK. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). for Upper Limit. select Level 2.

you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. under 3D Views. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. double-click {3D}. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.73 Save the file. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.

Clear Itemize every instance. select Family and Type. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. click Family and Type. 9 Using the same method. under Available fields. and click OK. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. under Category. For Then by. select Material: Description. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 5 On the Design Bar. Select Grand totals.EPDM. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 4 In the Type Selector. select Roofs.Insulation on Plywood Deck . and click Add. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Modify. 3 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 .

The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. for Fields. for Material: Cost.40 50. under Other. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. type Estimated Cost. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Area. click Edit. and under Fields.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 For Formula. 12 Click OK. and click Properties. 17 Click Calculated Value. for Name. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). click Estimated Cost. and click Add. select Material: Cost. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Calculate totals. click the Formatting tab. 21 Click OK. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. 23 For Field formatting.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 19 For Type. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. under Available fields. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. and click OK twice. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. select Currency. select Calculate totals.

and schedule the total distance of each path. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. 26 In the Project Units dialog. 28 For Unit symbol.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . verify that 2 decimal places is selected. and reporting the shared parameters. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. creating a generic tag to tag the family. which inserts commas after every three digits. you create an exiting plan for the building. for Rounding. and are defined and stored in an external file. you create a shared parameter file. These shared parameters can be added to any family. either within family components or within the project template. adding the shared parameters to a family. 30 Click OK twice. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. ensuring consistency across families and projects. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. select $. You draw a travel path line. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. 27 In the Format dialog. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. click the Format value. In this lesson. Digit grouping. The cost fields are formatted correctly. for Currency. 31 Save the file. regardless of category. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 29 Select Use digit grouping. tag the line. can be used for any number-based parameter. not just for currency. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters.

6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and click Save. for Type of Parameter. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New.rvt.rvt. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Create. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. type Travel Distance. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. for Name. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click New. for Name. 9 Under Parameters. 7 Under Parameters. for File name. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. type Path ID. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. type OfficeStandardsParameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. select Length. under Groups. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 11 Click OK twice.txt. click Training Files. click New. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. type Exiting.

14 On the Design Bar. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 11 Click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. If you have multiple projects open. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. under Parameter Data. and click OK. select Shared parameter. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. group it under Dimensions. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 8 Select Instance. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 .rfa. and click Select. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Add. otherwise the family loads into the current project. for Travel Distance Formula. in the Load into Projects dialog. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. and click OK. and select Instance. under Parameters.rvt. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 10 Using the same method. and click OK. type Length. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. following the equals symbol (=). 15 If necessary. under Parameters. click Load into Projects. select Constraints. under Parameter Type. 13 Click Apply. for Group parameter under. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Dimensions. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and click OK.rvt. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. click Family Types. Click Training Files. click Add. 3 On the Design Bar. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog.

19 On the Design Bar. click Label. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click (Add Parameter). under Parameters. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Training Files. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. under Category Parameters. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. select Travel Distance. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click parameter(s) to label). 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog.rft. click Select. and click OK. 24 Click OK twice. click Label. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. and move it down.rfa. 32 In the Save As dialog. 29 In the drawing window. type M_Travel Distance Tag.rvt is selected.28 On the Design Bar. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . and click Save. and click OK. and press DELETE. for File Name. click Modify. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. select Path ID. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. click Load into Projects. 35 Save the file. 33 On the Design Bar.

Level 1. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.Tagging. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Placing. double-click Exiting Plan . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.rvt. select Chain. click Component. 6 Move the cursor to the right. above the exterior door as shown. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. and click in the center of the corridor. After the lines are tagged. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 4 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.

under Floor Plans.7 Move the cursor down. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Component. 17 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. move the cursor near the right corner. type 1-1. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.Level 2. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . and click outside of the building. double click Exiting Plan . for Path ID. verify that Chain is selected. click Tag ➤ By Category. select the 2 dashed travel lines. and click (Element Properties). 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. through the door. and click OK. Placing. 13 While pressing CTRL.Tagging.

and click in the stair. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 21 On the Design Bar. and click. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. and click above the door to the stair. 20 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor down.19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Component. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

under Category. for Path ID. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. 33 For Name. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 While pressing CTRL. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. type 2-1. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. Placing. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 30 Using the same method.24 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. . click Modify. and click OK. under Constraints. click Modify. type Level 1 Exit Distance. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path.

click Edit. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. in the third field. for Filter. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK.rvt. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type 2-. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and click Properties. under Schedules/Quantities. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 38 For Sort by. type Level 2 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID. 44 In the Project Browser. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. select contains. and in the third field. 49 Click OK twice. for Filter by. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Add. under Available fields. under Other. select Travel Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. select Path ID. 35 Click the Filter tab. select Calculate totals. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. in the first field. 41 Under Fields. 42 Click OK. and under Field formatting. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. in the second field. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. type 1-. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Path ID and Travel Distance. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 43 In the Project Browser. 46 In the Project Browser. while pressing CTRL. and click Rename. 50 Save the file. 36 For Filter by. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. expand C . select the following fields. 10 In the schedule. 9 Click OK twice. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click View.152 mm. and click OK. under Categories. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click .Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Under Available fields. and select C1010145 . right-click Generic . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. select Walls. click Schedule/Quantities. right-click the Design Bar. under Identity Data. and click Properties.Fixed Partitions. click the Fields tab.Interiors ➤ C10 .Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Partitions . expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. for Assembly Code.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . click the Value field. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 .

and click OK to create the database. 3 Click New. click Create. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Database Name. under Database. click Export ➤ ODBC Database.mdb. the database display may be different than that shown.rvt.mdb). 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. select a location for the database file. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. click OK. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 1 On the File menu. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 In the New Database dialog. 6 Click Finish. and click Next. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. and click Next. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. click the File Data Source tab. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog.11 Close the exercise file. click Training Files. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 Click OK 3 times. 9 Under Directories. type Revit_Project.

tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. 13 Close the exercise file. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. in addition to the Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. For example. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Additionally.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code.

262 .

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. 263 . Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

add detail components. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. and metal studs.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. These components display at the required scale. like a standard door header condition. plywood. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. In the callout view. you trace over the building model geometry. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. 297 . For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. In order to detail from the building model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. which means that all detail components. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you detail the view of the roof edge. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. After you add components. double-click the detail callout head. Exact location is not important. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 5 In the alert dialog. region objects. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and insulation objects. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. click Training Files. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Detailing the View In this exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. You load detail components. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal.rvt. The roof overhang detail displays. click Training Files. 7 In the drawing area.rfa. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. and click OK. click Detail Component. as well as detail lines. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. select As underlay. They are also view specific.

click (Element Properties). 15 For Spacing. for Pattern ➤ Detail. Detailing the View | 299 . Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Repeating Detail. and click OK. enter 406.8 Delete the component. 16 Click OK twice. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 13 In the Name dialog. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.5mm. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Modify. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. 17 In the drawing area. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 19 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. select Corrugated Metal.

Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. ■ ■ Click Modify. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. and click Open. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 22 On the Options Bar. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. click Training Files. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected.rfa.

31 To properly orient the component. Detailing the View | 301 . 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Detail Component. and click Open. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. you load them as a group from a single file. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. and place it in the detail view as shown. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 29 On the Design Bar. click OK. 30 In the Type Selector. click Training Files.Because you still have several components to load.rvt. 33 In the Type Selector.

302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click the Flip instance arrows.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 37 Click Modify. select Chain. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. and click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.

and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. select to near side. For Offset. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. enter 140mm. as shown. click Detail Component. click (Move).Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 303 . 42 Click Modify. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. click Insulation. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation.

47 In the Type Selector. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. click Detail Lines. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 51 Click Modify. meaning they display only in this view. as shown.45 In the Type Selector. and lock the component. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. select Thin Lines. you add lines to your detail. Like detail components. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. they are view specific. Adding Detail Lines on page 304.

9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. select Thin Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. click Detail Lines. For Offset. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. and press ENTER. as shown. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . 10 On the Design Bar. For Offset. enter 10mm. 7 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 11 In the Type Selector. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).4 Click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. as shown. enter 10mm.

select Chain. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. click (Draw). and draw the detail lines as shown. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

enter 10mm. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select the Penthouse level line. When you turn the display model off. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. For Offset. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 22 In the Project Browser. draw the detail lines as shown. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. select Thin Lines. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. select Do not display. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. and press ENTER. and click OK. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. and click Properties. click Detail Lines. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. 24 On the View Control Bar. Click (Pick Lines).18 In the Type Selector. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Vapor Barrier. right-click. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 26 In the Type Selector.

30 In the Type Selector. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 32 Click Modify. click Detail Component. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing .29 On the Design Bar. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes on page 308. you add text notes to complete the detail. select M_Break Line. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.

Click again to specify the location of the text box. and click to place the dimension. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click Dimension. Enter the text.rvt. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes | 309 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Text.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 6 Click Modify. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component.

and press DELETE. and click OK. right-click. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. on the Options Bar. click 6 In the Filter dialog. for Suffix. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof Overhang Detail.Keynotes. (Filter Selection). under Text Fields. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. and click Rename. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click the dimension text. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area.rvt. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click Select All Instances.7 Select the dimension line. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select a text note. Creating Detail Components on page 310. and click OK. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. enter Typ. and save the exercise file. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click..

while pressing CTRL.rft. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open. 15 Use a window to select all linework. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. select Medium Lines. select all the coping linework. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. in the Type Selector. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. click Training Files. Creating Detail Components | 311 .7 Click Modify. and selecting the chain. 16 Click Modify. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 14 Click Modify. pressing TAB.

The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. double-click it in the Project Browser. click . Adding Keynotes In this exercise. and click Open. click Load into Projects. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. While pressing SHIFT. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. delete the underlying linework. select the coping. and click OK. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 Using a window. enter Roof Edge. navigate to your preferred location. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 28 On the Options Bar.Keynotes view is not the open view. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 25 In the Filter dialog. and click Save. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Using the same method used previously. 24 On the Options Bar. 30 In the drawing area. clear Detail Items. click Detail Component. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click Load. 21 To place the component. click Detail Component.18 In the Save As dialog. click Training Files. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 26 Press DELETE. 22 Click Modify. 27 On the Design Bar. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for File name.rfa. you place keynotes on objects. and the component can be placed in the detail. The original linework remains selected. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping.

click Edit/New. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. (Element Properties). select the metal fascia with drip edge. Roof Edge4. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.rfa. use keynote 06160. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. use keynote 07645. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 19mm Plywood. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. For the metal coping.C1.B5. 63mm Rigid Insulation.rvt. 2 In the alert dialog. Adding Keynotes | 313 . Click to place the leader arm. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and click OK. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 6 Click Modify. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. and click Open.D11.

22mm Corrugated Steel . 18 Save the file. use keynote 06160. use keynote 06110. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.G1. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.F1. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.F1. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314.20 Ga. For the 50 x 150. click Keynote ➤ Element. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. FasciaProfile_1. For the 50 x 300. click Detail Component. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.9 In the Type Properties dialog. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. select Corrugated Metal. For the 50 x 200. using keynote 07460. 17 Keynote the component.A8. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.D11.I1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click . navigate to 07645. 12 On the Design Bar. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .D1. 11 Click OK 3 times. click in the Value column. You do this in order to keynote the component. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 15 In the Type Selector. use keynote 06110. use keynote 09250.

18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Lines. 8 In the Save As dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select the right end point. select Medium Line Detail Component. 13 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Edit/New. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the drawing area. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 20 Click OK 3 times. 19 In the Name dialog. 24 While pressing CTRL. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load into Projects. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 16 Select the component. click Load. 11 Press DELETE. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 6 Lock the line. and click Open. 4 In the Type Selector. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component.rft. select the left end point of the reference line. click Duplicate. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. and click Save. 9 On the Design Bar. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). select Medium Lines. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. navigate to your preferred location. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. and m_Light Line Detail Component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rvt. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. and click Open. click Training Files. 15 Click Modify. click Training Files. for File name. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click (Move). 49 With the component selected. 38 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 43 Zoom to the repeating component.G1.25 Next. enter EPDM Membrane. and click . 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof.A5. and hidden) used in the view. 42 Using the same method used previously. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 34 In the Name dialog. and assign it keynote 06110. 40 Click Modify. 46 Click Modify. 30 Click Modify. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. against the 19mm plywood. click Duplicate. and click the lower end at the break line. click Detail Component. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . You add the components to the project and keynote them. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 44 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Select the component. 27 On the Design Bar. 29 In the drawing area. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 47 Select the component. 28 In the Type Selector. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 41 Select the component just added. 37 Click OK 3 times. click in the Value column. click Detail Component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. name the component Air Barrier. and click OK. and assign it keynote 07260. 48 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. and click .A1. select m_Light Line Detail Component. and click . click Edit/New. invisible. and click .

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . select Chain. 52 In the Type Selector. and click . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 53 On the Options Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. click Detail Component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 55 Click Modify. leaving the detail component lines.

Air Barrier. and Vapor Barrier. 67 In the Type Selector. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . name the component Vapor Barrier. 50 x 200 Framing. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Keynote ➤ Element. 61 In the drawing area. 68 In the drawing area. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 63 In the drawing area. 60 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.rfa. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.A4.58 Using the method used previously. select the component. in the Type Selector. and assign it keynote 07260. click Detail Component. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select Invisible Lines.rfa.

Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. The database file opens in a text editor. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.69 Select the component. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and press TAB. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. add a keynote for the component. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. name the component Batt Insul. 70 Using the method used previously. and close the text editor. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . and press TAB. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise..txt. Enter 07460. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. click Browse. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. and assign it keynote 07210. Enter 07463.A4. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. and click . under Keynote Table.rvt.A1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 71 In the drawing area. 72 Save the file.A9. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 3 In the text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and press ENTER.

you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). click to place the leader. and click OK. Each keynote displays as a simple number. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. and click OK. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. select Absolute. and click Open. select all the keynotes. you learn how to create a drafted detail. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar.A1. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. After you create a drafting view.txt. under Path Type. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. In the Type Selector. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 11 Click Modify. 9 In the drawing area. navigate to 07463. 14 Save the file. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. and click to place the note. click Keynote ➤ Element. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 13 Click Modify. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog.

For Colors. The detail is imported as an import symbol.Center to Center is selected. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 .dwg. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Auto . 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. right-click Drafting 1. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. and click Rename.rvt. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The detail that you import is in DWG format. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 7 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Scale. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. select Black and White. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Click Open. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select 1 : 5. For Positioning.rvt. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.

Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. enter Detail . 5 Click Modify. 6 Select the callout. 3 On the Options Bar. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. and click OK. and click Properties. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 10 In the Rename dialog. click Edit/New. click Callout. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. select Reference other view. delete the existing value. for New. click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 12 Click OK twice. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.

15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. double-click A105 . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.Elev. 19 Proceed to the next exercise./Sect. click Modify.No Reference). and double-click the callout./Det. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . The callout is updated with the sheet information. 18 Save the file. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Duplicate. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. enter Header @ Sliding Door.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Board. 3 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. for Name. select Gypsum-Plaster. 5 In the Type Selector. enter Gyp. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . . verify that the scale is 1 : 5. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and click OK. 14 Click OK 3 times. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. click Region Properties. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 11 In the Name dialog. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click Detail Component. for Name.

Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 17 Click Modify. 19 In the Type Selector. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. and on the Edit toolbar. 16 Select the left edge of the region. and enter 20. 18 While pressing CTRL. Draw a rectangle as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . select Wide Lines. click Finish Sketch. select the width dimension. select the left and bottom edges of the region.5mm.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click 22 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). (Mirror). 20 On the Design Bar. click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. select Wood . and click above the top of the region as the end point. click Duplicate.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.Finish. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Name. 33 Click OK 3 times. click Filled Region. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 30 In the Name dialog. click Region Properties. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Finish. Move the cursor up. and click OK. 25 Click Modify. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. . enter Wood . 24 Select the mirrored region.

and select the right edge of the wood region. click Filled Region. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.5mm. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. in the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. click (Align). Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. select Medium Lines. click (Rectangle). Draw a rectangle as shown. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . select Medium Lines. 38 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 40 On the Options Bar. verify that the thickness is 19mm.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. sketch the new region as shown. click .

Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 46 On the Tools toolbar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Finish Sketch. click Ref Plane. For Offset. enter 10mm. click 48 Click Modify. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Filled Region. (Align). For Offset. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. and press ENTER. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 47 Click the reference plane.42 On the Design Bar. enter 6mm.

and press ENTER. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click Finish Sketch. and select the bottom horizontal line. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. For Offset. and click to select the point. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . click (Trim/Extend). 56 On the Design Bar. Select Chain.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click to select the point. and click to select the point. enter 0. Move the cursor right 25mm. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Move the cursor left 25mm. Move the cursor down 305mm.

and right edges of the door panel region. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. enter 3mm. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.rfa. and press ENTER. 60 Select the left. click Training Files. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. For Offset. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 58 In the Type Selector. 62 Select the left detail line. top. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Load.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 65 On the Options Bar. 69 Select the bolt. 68 Click Modify. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 76. click Detail Component. and press ENTER. select the height dimension.2mm. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. and click Open. 61 Click Modify. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

71 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. click Detail Component. 74 Select the expansion bolt. and click Open. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. click Load. use the images as a guide. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 .rfa. select Wide Lines.70 On the Design Bar. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 76 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines.

click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 82 Select the rectangle. (Mirror). 79 In the Type Selector. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 87 Click Modify. click . 84 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click .78 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. 85 On the Options Bar.

Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. as shown. click Detail Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 90 In the Type Selector. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 92 Select the line. 89 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. select Medium Lines. click (Mirror). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 .88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region.

click Detail Lines. enter 3mm. 97 On the Options Bar. select M_Break Line. and press ENTER. click . Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 99 Click Modify. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 101 On the Design Bar. 95 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. select the length dimension. 103 Add two break lines as shown.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click Detail Component.

click Dimension. and click Modify. 107 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 .5mm Arial. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 110 Select the dimension line. using the Drag Text grip. click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector. 105 In the drawing area.

and click the dimension text. under Dimension Value. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types.2. select Replace With Text. and then click the dimension text. for Below. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 113 Under Text Fields. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. enter See Schedule. 118 Select Modify to end the command. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension.5mmArial. select Replace With Text. 114 Click OK. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter Varies. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. under Dimension Value. click Dimension.

129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. click to create an arced leader. 123 Click OK. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . and click Modify. 128 Select the note. 125 In the Options Bar.121 Click OK. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. select the gypsum board region on the left. click Text. Board. and on the Options Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. 126 In the drawing area. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 127 Enter Gyp. and click to place the text.

132 Save the file.131 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.rvt. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and double-click East. 339 . Creating a Note Block In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. click Training Files. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.

340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Symbol. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Number of Leaders. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . type 1. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the keynote. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.Hexagon.

and click OK. on the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit toolbar.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. click (Element Properties). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Note Block | 341 . type Seal existing doors and insulate. for Text. and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Copy). 13 Select the tag. under Identity Data.

15 For Text. and on the Options Bar. 19 With the tag selected. 17 Click OK. on the Edit toolbar. 16 For Tag. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. (Mirror). click Copy. type B. 18 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. type Repair existing door surround. click (Element Properties). and click. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .14 With the copy selected.

Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. click Modify. Remove all existing windows. using the table as a reference. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Repair as required. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Tuckpoint as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean exterior brick wall. 22 Optionally. Repair existing door surround. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar. and moving counter-clockwise.

24 In the New Note Block dialog. Select Text. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. On the Appearance tab. and for Alignment. and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for the value. expand Schedules/Quantities. type Exterior Construction Notes. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. expand Sheets (all). Clean cut and repair wall as required. and click Add. for Heading. for Note block name. verify that Arial is selected. 26 Click OK. type 6 mm. for Sort by. On the Formatting tab. under Available fields. and select Bold. for Header text.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. select Tag. 27 In the column header (text). format. select Center. and click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. type Description. select Tag. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 29 In the Project Browser.Elevations. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Exterior Construction Notes. 28 In the Project Browser. and double-click A103 . and drag it to the sheet. Create. type Mark.

32 Zoom in to see the note block. Using Drawing Lists | 345 .rvt.rvt. double-click T . under Sheets (all). 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.31 On the Design Bar. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.Title Sheet. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. 1 In the Project Browser. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Modify.

select does not equal. select Sheet Number. ■ 4 Click OK. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. and click Add. in the second field. double-click T . 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. select Sheet Index. change Drawing List to Sheet Index.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. The drawing list displays. On the Filter tab. and in the third field. select Sheet Number. and drag it to the sheet. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 5 In the list title field. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Sheet Number. type T. for Filter by. and click Add.Title Sheet. under Sheets (all). in the first field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Sort by. Select Sheet Name. under Available fields. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser.

10 Zoom in to the drawing list. doors. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. windows. For the text. click Modify. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 11 Save the file. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Finally. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Training File Using Legends | 347 . and so on). and door frames.9 On the Design Bar. door frame schedule. On construction documents. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. On construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model.

348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK twice. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Name. 10 For Text Size. for Name.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click .Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. click Edit/New. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. and click OK. select Arial. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head .rvt. click Text. type Legend Text. type Typical Symbol Legend. click Duplicate. 6 On the Options Bar. click Symbol.Open Level Head . Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. you create a text type with the necessary size. type 3mm. 9 For Text Font.

Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. expand Sheets (all). expand Legends. and double-click A101 . verify that is selected. click Typical Symbol Legend. and click to place it. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and for Leader. 16 In the Project Browser. 14 Working from the top down. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 .Site Plan/Floor Plan.

21 In the Type Selector. under Sheets. double-click A102 . and click to place it. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 18 On the Design Bar. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.Unit 18. 19 In the Project Browser.17 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 23 Save the file.

For View. for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. type 900 mm.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 3 For Scale. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select Section. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet.rvt. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Legend Component. select 1 : 50. select Medium for Detail Level. and press ENTER. type 4th Floor Wall Types. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. For Host length. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. and click OK. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . 5 On the View Control Bar. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.

and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. for Family. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click Text. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 10 Select the second wall. 12 In the Type Selector.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. click to add text without a leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 13 On the Options Bar. for Leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .9 On the Design Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. click Modify.

22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The text note with leader is added to the legend. right-click Sheets (all). and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 19 Type the following text. select Level 4. click to add text with a single-segment leader. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . and drag it to the new sheet. 23 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. under Floor Plans. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.

28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. 26 On the Design Bar. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. select 4th Floor Wall Types. The open drawings are both visible. under Floor Plans. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.25 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. drag it onto the sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. under Legends. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.

Creating a Component Legend | 355 . The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. select the Wall Type 2 component. 35 On the View Control Bar. 33 In the floor plan view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 34 Select the patio divider wall. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click (Match Type). zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. select Detail Level: Medium.

and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. These changes can be due to owner requests. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. under Floor Plans. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. contractor inquiries. You can create a sequence of revisions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Using the table. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. In this exercise. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.36 Optionally. or changes in building material availability. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. double-click Level 4. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. click 37 Save the file.

you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. If Visible is not selected. type a date.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. 7 Under Show. If you select Per Sheet. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. In most instances. for Numbering. if the active revision is number 1. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. yet as concise as possible. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. verify that Per Project is selected. 5 For Description. When Issued is selected. the revision is locked and issued to the field. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. For example. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. When you use this option.

click Modify.rvt. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. you make changes to the project floor plan. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click (Move). move the cursor up. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 6 On the Design Bar. including revision number and revision date. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 5 Select the divider. 9 Save the file. under Floor Plans. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. 3 Select the divider. 4 On the Edit toolbar.8 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.

and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click near the partition you moved. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Finish Sketch. click Revision Cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. select Snaps Off. In the Snaps dialog. and click OK. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 .

14 In the Object Styles dialog. select 6. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 16 Click OK. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. click the Annotation Objects tab. 17 Save the file.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. for Line Weight.

2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 10 In the drawing area. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because you chose to number by project. click Tags. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 8 In the Tags dialog. click OK. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Floor Plans. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 5 In the Tags dialog. you need to add one. 6 Click Load. click Training Files. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds.rfa. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 12 Save the file. select Leader. double-click Level 4. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 4 On the Options Bar. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 11 Click to place the tag. scroll down to Revision Clouds. You then issue a revision.rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and because the revision is the first in the project. Working with Revisions In this exercise. the cloud is tagged as number 1. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag.

8 Add another revision row. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. and enter a date for the revision.Unnamed. You can continue to add revisions. you can no longer modify it. 9 Click OK. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. click Add. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 7 For Description. and click OK. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You do this by issuing the revision. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE After you issue a revision. you prevent further changes to the revision. type Modify Paving Area. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. and enter a date. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. with the description Relocate Door. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets. double-click A107 . 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. select Issued.rvt.

3 . 10 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. select the revision cloud. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 19 To add tags. in the drawing area. 20 On the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. 12 In the drawing area. 17 Using the same method learned previously. under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). select Tag ➤ By Category. apply Seq. 11 On the Drafting tab. 2 . Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule.Unnamed. for Revision.Modify Paving Area. click to add a revision clouds. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. select Seq. 15 On the Options Bar.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. double-click A107 . select Revision Cloud. Working with Revisions | 363 . 13 Click Finish Sketch.

You do this so that the revision can be changed. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select the titleblock. and rotation) to the revision schedule. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. Click Options. for Numbering. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. delete the first 3 characters. height.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. select Alphabetic. clear Issued. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. you edit the titleblock family. for Sequence. 26 In the drawing area. beginning with "D". For each revision. 25 Click OK twice.

select Bottom-up. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. click Yes. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. click Edit. and drag it above the schedule area. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. under Other. Working with Revisions | 365 . Select Grid lines. for Appearance. click Edit Family. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 28 In the alert dialog. and press DELETE. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family.27 On the Options Bar. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. click Yes. right-click Revision Schedule. Select Outline. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Load into Projects. and click Properties. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. for Build Schedule. 33 Select the schedule header. 34 On the Design Bar. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Clear Blank row before data.

48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. under Other. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 46 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. for Heading. open the titleblock family for editing.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. and click Properties. right-click Revision Schedule. for Rotation on Sheet. select User defined.. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. for Height. select the revision schedule. enter Rev. 45 On the Appearance tab. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 40 Select the revision schedule header. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Formatting. click Edit. select 90° Counterclockwise. When the height property is variable. With a user-defined height.

text. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Load into Projects.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you learn to import information (such as images. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. click Yes. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet.

click Modify.rvt.Importing Image Files In this exercise. click Training Files. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click to add text without a leader. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets. for Leader. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. and place it on a sheet.Title Sheet.rvt. double-click T .JPG. under Sheets. 5 On the Design Bar.Title Sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 1 In the Project Browser. click Text. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click T . 3 On the Options Bar.

Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 6 Select the text. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 11 Save the file. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. with the new text box still selected. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. click Modify. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.doc text file in another window.

you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. click Desktop. This process may vary from system to system.JPG.rvt. click Training Files.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 12 Save the file. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. under Sheets. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. and click Save. This step has been completed for you. type Fixture Schedule. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. click File menu ➤ Print. 5 Click OK. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 4 Under Printer. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.xls.mdi.Unit 18. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 10 On the Design Bar. and saved as Fixture Schedule. for Name. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. select the document writer. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 1 In the Project Browser. for File name.JPG. click Modify. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 3 In Microsoft Excel. double-click A102 .

called dependent views.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. 371 . To effectively document this project. The large floor plan. or footprint. as well as a large lab building. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 .Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.

3 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 . right-click Dependent on Level 2. and the model crop is the interior crop region. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 6 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans.Aviary. select the crop region. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 5 Click in the drawing area. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. right-click Level 2. The dependent view opens. click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 2 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. for Name.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 .8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). click (Hide Crop Region). 9 On the View Control Bar.

click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Click in the drawing area. and click OK. right-click Level 2. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 15 Select the crop region. for Name. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. enter Level 2 . and click Rename. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 12 In the Project Browser.10 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit.Labs. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and on the Zoom flyout. and on the Zoom flyout.

18 On the Design Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 20 Click in the drawing area. click Matchline.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. under Floor Plans. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and on the Zoom flyout. click Modify. double-click Level 2. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. click Zoom To Fit.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 .

click Finish Sketch. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 24 On the Design Bar. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and click. Click above the left corner of the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 .Unnamed. select 9. 28 For Line Pattern. 31 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.Aviary. for Name. and click OK. enter Level 2 Aviary.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and drag it onto the sheet. and click OK. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 27 Under Matchline. select Double Dash. 33 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. click OK to accept the default titleblock. under Floor Plans. expand Sheets. click the Annotation Objects tab. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click A101 . click Level 2 . 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.

under Floor Plans.Aviary is selected. for Target view. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and place the Level 2 . 39 On the Options Bar. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.35 On the Design Bar.Labs dependent view on the sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. double-click Level 2. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 .

NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 45 On the Zoom flyout. click Modify.Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. for Target view. click Zoom To Fit. 41 On the Options Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

49 If. double-click Level 2 . 47 On the View Control Bar. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 48 Select the crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.46 In the Project Browser. right-click.Aviary. click (Show Crop Region). and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. after modifying the annotation crop region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. under Floor Plans. click the far right control. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). click Zoom To Fit. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 52 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 54 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . expand Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). select all views in the list. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. and click OK. and click Apply Dependent Views.

right-click South Elevation. and double-click South Elevation. click Training Files. click Zoom To Fit. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .57 On the Zoom flyout.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The matchline is already placed in the view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the view. 5 In the drawing area.The dependent view opens. right-click South Elevation. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Rename. for Name. expand South Elevation. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 8 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. and click OK. 4 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 9 In the Project Browser.Right. and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region). select the Crop Region. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . for Name. 3 In the Project Browser. enter South Elevation . 7 On the View Control Bar. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 10 In the Rename View dialog.Left. cropping the view to the lab building. 11 Select the crop region. enter South Elevation . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. cropping the view to the aviary.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View on page 403. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . click Modify. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The perspective view displays. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. c_Pool_House_in_progress. on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. click Camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.rvt.

in the Project Browser.3 Zoom out. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. double-click Site. as necessary. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. right-click 3D View 1. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. and select the crop boundary. If the camera is not shown in the view. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. as shown. under Floor Plans. and click Show Camera. Depending on camera placement. and adjust the field of vision. With the camera shown. Creating a Perspective View | 405 .

11 Proceed to the next exercise.Day to open the view.6 In the Project Browser.Day. 8 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 10 Save the file. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . double-click Exterior . and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. enter Exterior . 7 In the Rename View dialog. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and click Rename.

rvt. double-click Exterior . modify render settings. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and render a daytime view of the exterior. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. You then duplicate the view. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . under 3D Views.Day.

select Sky: Cloudy. for New. NOTE If a background image is required. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Sun. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings.Santa Monica. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. enter Spring Equinox . for Setting. 8 Under Quality. select Medium. and click Render. 6 Click OK twice. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Edit/New. 3 In the Rendering dialog. 5 In the Rename dialog. and click Rename. under Lighting. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. 3pm. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. In this case. You adjust cloud settings as required. under Background.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. select Spring Equinox. You create a location and time for the rendering.

click Show the model. click Desktop. click Show the rendering. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Files of type. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. Click Save. After the image is rendered.png). click Export. 10 In the Rendering dialog.9 In the Rendering dialog. select Portable Network Graphics (*. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.

enter Pool House Lights. and click Artificial Lights. click Render.Flat Round : 60W . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. and click Move to Group. and click OK.Night. 16 With the Exterior . enter Pool Lights. highlight 9 :Sconce Light .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. select the first light. and click OK.Night view open. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. under 3D Views.Exterior . for Scheme.Day. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only. under Lighting. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior .120V to the Pool Lights group.120V through 35 :Sconce Light .120V. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Name. To select a sequential list. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. verify that Pool Lights is selected. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. you duplicate the view and change the settings. under Group Options. click OK. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. press and hold SHIFT.Flat Round : 60W . under Ungrouped Lights. 22 Using the same method. 25 Using the same method. on the View Control Bar. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click New.Night. and select the last light. and click OK. 27 In the Rendering dialog.Day view to Exterior . add 30 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. right-click Exterior . for Name.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. click Dialog). dialog. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. under Group Options.Flat Round : 60W . click New.Flat Round : 60W .

but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. After the image is rendered. enter 4. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . Rendering an Interior View on page 411. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. under Image. 32 Save the file. click Adjust Exposure.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. and click OK. click Show the model. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. you change the brightness of the exposure. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. In this example. 30 In the Rendering dialog.

rvt. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. define the perspective view and rendering settings. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . render the views.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. and finally.

Exact placement is not important. click Modify. click Component. select RPC Female : YinYin. 5 On the Design Bar. the person’s line of sight. and place the component inside the pool house. Adding RPC People | 413 . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the figure. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. ■ (Rotate). Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. and on the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser.

on the Options Bar. click Edit. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. you can enable this option. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. for Render Appearance Properties. select Cast Reflections. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. under Parameters. under Identity Data. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 13 On the Design Bar. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Modify. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. By default. click (Element Properties). 12 Click OK 3 times. 14 Save the file. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. In order to see the figure’s reflection.

and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.15 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.

and click OK. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .The perspective view displays. under Extents. 4 In the Project Browser. select Section Box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. right-click 3D View 1. and click Properties. under 3D Views. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.

double-click South. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . in addition to the 3D view. under Floor Plans. select the section box.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In order to accurately adjust the section box. double-click Level 1. 11 In the 3D view. 9 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view.

right-click.12 In the floor plan view. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select the section box. 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown.

Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 17 Save the file. and curtain walls.15 Maximize the 3D view. doors that contain windows or glass. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. To create a daytime view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and render the interior view. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

5 Click Artificial Lights. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Draft.rvt. click (Show Rendering Dialog). c_Pool_House_in_progress. for Setting. under Lighting. and click Rename. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering.Night. and click OK. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. enter Interior . click Render. 7 Under Quality.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Rendering dialog. right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. and click OK. you turn them off for this scene. After these settings are established. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. under 3D Views. clear Pool Lights. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. You can specify a lower quality. 2 In the Rename View dialog. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. select Interior: Artificial only. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 3 On the View Control Bar.

For more information on daylight portals. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. for Sun. select Interior: Sun only. the daylight portals can be turned on. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. select Edit. click 14 For Setting. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . select Spring Equinox . The preset schemes are read-only. click Copy To Custom. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar.Night. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. By default they are turned off.Santa Monica. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. In this case. 17 In the Rendering dialog. in order to turn on daylight portals. and click OK. for Daylight Portal Options. For sunlit interiors.Day. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Rendering dialog. and click Render. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. You create a view for the interior during the day. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. select Curtain Walls. select Region. you must create a custom setting. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. right-click Interior . 3pm. (Show Rendering Dialog). Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 .9 Close the Rendering dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. but the space will receive standard daylighting. for Scheme. see the Revit Architecture Online Help.

View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. and close the Rendering dialog. select the column on the right. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and on the Options Bar. In the next steps. Click OK. For Saturation. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area.18 In the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. 20 In the Rendering dialog. click Properties). enter 10. enter 1. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. click Show the model. under Image.

31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. For Width. You change the varnish setting. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column.6. select Based on wood grain. 23 With the column still selected. 30 In the drawing area. add a bump map to create texture. select the crop boundary. select Scale (locked proportions). For Bump. enter 90. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. enter 5''. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. and click Render. select Unfinished. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection.22 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . For Rotate. and on the Options Bar. select Wood. Click OK. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select High. As size and DPI are increased. for Setting. click (Show Rendering Dialog). The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 26 Click Update Preview. select Printer. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. under Output Settings. For Amount. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 24 In the Materials dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. clear Region. for Resolution. the render time increases significantly. click OK.

but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. elevation. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. In a plan view. but you can also define it in a 3D. or section view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you rendered an exterior and an interior view.The rendered image displays. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. Usually. The walkthrough path is a spline. independent of the Revit Architecture software. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project.

proceeds through the dining room. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. on the Options Bar. and change unit formats as desired. expand Views (all). and ends in the far corner of the living room. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . click Walkthrough. click Settings ➤ Project Units.rvt. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If you prefer to use metric values. and double-click 1st Floor. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and click the tab in the context menu. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Perspective is selected. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser.

on the Options Bar.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. click Finish. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 11 Under Change. click Edit Walkthrough. 17 Click . select the crop boundary. If it is not. and select the crop boundary. verify that Field of view is selected. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 12 On the View menu. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . and click OK. and for Height. 13 On the Options Bar. for Width. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 16''. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. for Frame. 14 Click . enter 1. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. enter 9''. on the Options Bar. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. 16 On the Options Bar.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. click (Element Properties). and click OK.rvt. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. clear Far Clip Active. double-click 1st Floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. click Edit Walkthrough. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. press ESC. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. under Floor Plans. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. under Extents. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 2 On the Options Bar. c_Townhouse. proceed to the next exercise.The walkthrough plays.

7 Click the third key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). for Controls. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . You can move any camera target or key frame position. and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path. 6 On the Options Bar. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.

Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. select <Shading>. 8 If you want to save this exercise. on the Options Bar.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 3 Under Format. under Walkthroughs. shading. under Output Length. and save the exercise file with a unique name. specifying the number of frames. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. The walkthrough is recorded. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. and click OK. When you export the walkthrough. If you are unsure of what option to use. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . reducing the size of the image. shading with edges. or rendering. for Frames/sec. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. for Compressor. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. click Edit Walkthrough.rvt. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. double-click Walkthrough 1. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 9 To play the walkthrough. for Model Graphics Style. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. and click Save. . you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. hidden line. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. c_Townhouse. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. enter 15. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. 2 In the Length/Format dialog.

A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. In this tutorial. 431 . Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. More specifically. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.

as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the View toolbar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point.Courtyard View In this exercise. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand Views (all).Creating a Solar Study . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. (SteeringWheels). expand Floor Plans. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis.rvt. click Camera. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A 3D view is created. and double-click 01 Entry. click shown. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view.

9 On the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 7 In the Project Browser.5 On the Design Bar. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. enter Solar Study .Courtyard View. expand 3D Views. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . 6 Click the view boundary to select it. if necessary. and click Rename. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 3 On the Design Bar. right-click 3D View 1. click Save As. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. click Section. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create a section cutaway view. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. double-click 01 Entry.

right-click Section 1. click . 11 On the SteeringWheel. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). double-click the section head. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Modify. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . as shown. expand Sections. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 13 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser.5 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. click 10 On the View toolbar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click Modify. 6 To view the section. and click Rename.

15 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. and click Rename. In some cases. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. including the house. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. clear Section Boxes. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. you create a plan cutaway view. and click Rename. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 18 On the File menu. 16 On the View Control Bar. then select Medium. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Save. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry. do not display many elements in 3D. 17 To hide the section box. then Fine. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.14 In the Project Browser. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 4 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. and click OK. as shown. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views. Typical plan views. right-click {3D}. click . On the Annotation Categories tab. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. under Floor Plans. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

9 On the SteeringWheel. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 15 Select the Roof. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click Modify. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . so you can see into the building from the top. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 11 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. click (SteeringWheels). as shown. as shown.8 On the View toolbar.

Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. right-click {3D}. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. 20 On the View Control Bar. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . under 3D Views. click Save. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 21 On the File menu. and click OK.17 On the View Control Bar.

Click the Single-Day tab. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. date range. and time. and click OK. . click . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. click . 2 On the View Control Bar. MA. leave the slider at 50. click click OK. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. you specify the location. and time range. enter Summer Solstice. Los Angeles. 3 Select Cast Shadows. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. select Los Angeles. expand 3D Views.Creating Solar Studies . 5 Click the Single-Day tab. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. USA. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 4 For Sun Position. For the Multi-Day solar study. 10 Under Place. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. date. USA is selected. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. You can create a still. you specify the location. CA.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. and click Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For this study. or multi-day solar study. expand Views (all).Boston. single-day. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study .rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. 9 In the Name dialog. for City. For the Single-Day solar study.

you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 16 In the Name dialog. click OK. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select June 22.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. For Time Range. 19 On the File menu. 2 On the View Control Bar. click OK. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 8 On the Options Bar. select Winter Solstice. click Save. enter Winter Solstice. and click OK. Los Angeles. on the Single-Day tab.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. ■ For Time Interval. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select December 22. click . NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. for Date. click . Under Frame. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. enter 20 and press ENTER. enter 10 and press ENTER. and click OK. confirm that Summer Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 2008. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . and click OK. Los Angeles is selected. under Frame. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 2008. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 In this case. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Duplicate. for Sun Position.Courtyard View is currently displayed. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles.

440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 13 On the View Control Bar. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. . click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. on the Single-Day tab. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. . select Summer Solstice. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. double-click 01 Entry. and click OK. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. click . click OK. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. The solar study animation plays. click . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. . ■ To display the previous sequential frame. under Floor Plans.■ To display the next key frame. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. approximately as shown. click To play the animation from start to finish. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. click To display the next sequential frame. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click Text. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Los Angeles.

Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 6 On the View Control Bar.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. expand 3D Views. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . as shown. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click and enter Dining. approximately as shown. On the Options Bar. as shown. click . click . click Lines. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. 8 For Sun Position. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area.

and click OK. 12 In the drawing area. select the section box. 14 Click outside of the section box. select Summer Solstice. as shown. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. On the Annotation Categories tab. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Frame Range. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 11 To display the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. ■ For Frames per second. and enter 5 to 50. clear Section Boxes. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. On the Annotation Categories tab. Los Angeles. 15 To hide the section box. select Section Boxes. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. and click OK. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. on the Single-Day tab. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under Output Length. and click OK. click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. if necessary. verify that the value is set to 15.

you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size.■ ■ Under Format. To maintain the proportions of the frame. select Frame Range. verify that Hidden Line is selected. enter 450 in the first field (width). ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. and enter 5 to 10. or frame. Los Angeles. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . Under Format. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. click OK. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. for Model Graphics Style. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 2 On the View Control Bar. on the Single-Day tab. click . 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. For Files of Type. To view the animation. For Dimensions. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 3 For Sun Position. select Winter Solstice. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. you open each image. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 19 In the Video Compression dialog.Los Angeles. verify that the value is set to 15. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. select AVI Files. For Frames per second. Click OK. and click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click OK. of the animation separately. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Model Graphics Style. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. For File Name. for Compressor. under Output Length. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop.

■ For Dimensions. under 3D Views. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. depending on the Frame Range. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . or GIF. BMP. Click OK. enter 450 in the first field (width). Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. TIFF. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. as shown: 9 On the File menu. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. click the Desktop icon. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 8 Click Save. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . or any single-frame format. such as JPEG. In this example. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. For File name.Los Angeles. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. click Save. select PNG. For Files of Type. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.

3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .

and click Duplicate. For Time Interval. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. MA. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes. 12 In the Name dialog. for Sun Position. 8 On the View Control Bar. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click OK. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and on the View Control Bar. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study .Los Angeles . click the Multi-Day tab. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Week Interval. USA. select One week.Boston. for File name enter 2pm . 5 Select the roof. and click OK. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For Time. and click OK. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. specify 2:00 pm.

■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. you mirror all model elements. and click Save. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. and click OK. such as East . 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). In the Length/Format dialog. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.South. for File Name.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Click the Desktop icon. and annotations in non-drafting views.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.West or North . you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. double-click 01 Entry. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click OK. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . When you mirror a project. for Compressor. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. under Floor Plans. model views. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.

In this exercise. 2 In the drawing area. The project is mirrored along the East . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click OK.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. under 3D Views. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK.West. 6 On the Standard toolbar. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. select the roof.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. select East . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 5 In the warning dialog. For additional information.West axis. Then. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. right-click.

Orienting to True North | 449 . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click the Still tab. 12 Under Date and Time. specify 11:00 AM for time. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click Apply. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Date and Time. and click OK. 11 For Sun Position. 8 For Sun Position. click . 5 For Sun Position. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. change the time back to 12:00 PM. on the Still tab.3 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. click . NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. and click OK. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. and select Winter Solstice. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. For example. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . select Summer Solstice.

When a project is started. and click OK. click . Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click Properties. double-click 01 Entry. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 19 In the Project Browser. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. and select Winter Solstice. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. and click OK. right click 01 Entry. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. for Orientation. click OK. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 15 For Sun Position. under Floor Plans. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. the view settings must be set for True North. click the Still tab. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 14 On the View Control Bar. click OK. select True North. 18 In the Project Browser.

■ To establish the new direction of True North. as shown.■ To establish the True North direction. Orienting to True North | 451 . The floor plan rotates in the view. click toward the top of the screen. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.

and click Apply. under 3D Views.23 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. select Summer Solstice. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. right-click 01 Entry. and click OK. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. for Orientation. and click OK. and click Properties. enter True North Orientation. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. select True North Orientation. select Project North. right-click. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 28 In the Project Browser. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 32 On the View Control Bar. 33 For Sun Position. right-click. select True North. and click Rename. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 01 Entry. for Orientation. 27 In the Rename View dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click . and click Element Properties. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Still tab.

enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. and click OK. and click OK. Click Save. click Summer Solstice. Click OK. Orienting to True North | 453 . click the Desktop icon. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that AVI Files is selected. In the Length/Format dialog. For Files of Type. for Dimensions. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. enter 600 in the first field. click OK. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. For File Name. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. for Compressor. Los Angeles. click the Single-Day tab. under Format.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 1 In the Project Browser. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. select Edit/New. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 3 On the View Control Bar. for Setting. select Interior: Sun only. Under Lighting. under 3D Views. In the Name dialog. select Medium. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Rendered views do not have this limitation. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. click Render. (Show Rendering Dialog). you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. and click Duplicate. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. In this exercise. for Scheme. Since a rendered image is temporary. under Quality.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. select 12/22. under Settings. and click OK. For Sun. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. for Date and Time. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. capturing it. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. and 2:00 PM. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. and exporting it as a JPEG image. select Winter Solstice. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles.

click Desktop. and click Save. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. For Files of type. verify that JPEG Files is selected. enter living area_winter solstice. Rendering an Interior View | 455 .6 In the Rendering dialog. click Save to Project. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Export. and click OK. NOTE Rendered views are temporary.

456 .

advanced model graphics. or the client. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. however.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. Whether the audience is the general contractor. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. In this tutorial. you can choose between realism and stylistics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. and details. When organizing presentation graphics. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. type. In this series of exercises. linework. Other tools in the software. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. you explore the stylistic approach. Co-house. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. elevations. and section boxes. an outside reviewer. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. length. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model. 457 . For the realistic approach. a consultant. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. sections. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. They include rendering.

and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a copy of the plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. To fit the floor plan into the analytique.

rvt. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . under Floor Plans. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Cnst. click Training Files. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. 2 In the Project Browser. Cnst. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. exit the menu. right-click 2nd Flr. and click Rename.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and other annotations in this view. sections. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. dimensions. and clear DOWN Text. expand the Stairs category. This turns off the visibility of all tags. this represents the view getting smaller. UP Text. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. No annotations display in the view. and Up Arrow. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 Under Visibility. and click Save. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Down Arrow. click the Annotation Categories tab. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 11 In the Save As directory.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 Click OK. navigate to the folder of your choice. elevations. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. click the Scale control and select 1:100. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.rvt. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.

click . If you select a different city. however. and select 1st Flr. For Sun Position. At that place. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar. 1:00 PM. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. Time and Place. on the Still tab. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. Cnst. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. NOTE For this step. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 7 For Place. click (Shadows Off). select By Date. click the Place tab. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 10/27. you can create. Within a project. 9 For City. for Date and Time. 6 Under Settings. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . and click OK. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Boston. you can select any city. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. MA. The higher the number. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. modify. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world.rvt. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 12 Click OK. click . ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 35. ■ For Contrast. click OK. the darker the shadows.

for Sun Position. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click OK. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 19 Proceed with the next exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. under Settings. click (Shadows On). 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. clear Ground Plane at Level.

and click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 .Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the cursor. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. select Arch Portrait. and click to place it. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 6 On the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. click Modify. click Sheet. and click View. click Add View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click Add View to Sheet. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and notice the view title.

and click Activate View. click Edit/New. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 9 On the Options Bar. click . To accomplish this. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. enter Presentation. for Show Title. click Duplicate. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Name dialog. For this analytique. select No. click OK. and click OK.

click Region Properties. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 18 On the Options Bar. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. When you finish drawing the chain.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. click . select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. select Invisible lines. and select Chain. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. and the boundary of the region. 20 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. click . You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click Edit/New. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 17 In the Type Selector. If necessary. fill properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines.

35 Proceed with the next lesson. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. under Name. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click OK. enter Solid Black. and click Deactivate View. and click View Properties. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 25 In the Name dialog. select Solid fill. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. for Fill Pattern. and click OK. under Graphics. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. for Sheet Name. under Identity Data. scroll down. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. click .

right-click South. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise.rvt. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. scroll up. 11 On the View Control Bar. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. under Pattern Overrides. specify 2:30 PM. 12 Under Shadow. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Duplicate. 13 For Contrast. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. By changing the angle of the sun. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 16 In the Name dialog. exit the menu. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 For Sun Position. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. clear Visible. under Visibility. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click . 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. under Settings. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click in the Walls row. 9 Click OK. expand the Doors category. and click OK. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Time and Place. right-click Copy of South. and clear Elevation Swing. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. specify 35. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. on the Model Categories tab. click in the drawing area. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click Rename.2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select By Date. click OK. 18 For Time. and click OK. click Override. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click (Shadows Off). enter Presentation South Elevation.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. double-click A105 . Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.Presentation. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet.rvt. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). click Add View. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.

5 In the Type Selector. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation.The viewport displays a view title. The view title no longer displays.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. click Modify.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.

472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 4 Add the section shown below.rvt. Cnst. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select 1: 100. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. double-click 1st Flr. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 3 On the Options Bar. click Section. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). under Floor Plans. Adjust the controls to modify the extents.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise.

Section 2 is added to the building model. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. click Callout. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. for Scale. this view needs to be rotated 180°. To accomplish this. select 1 : 100. expand Sections (Callout 1). 7 On the Options Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 2.

enter Presentation Section 2. scroll up. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click in the Walls row. click Override. 10 In the Project Browser. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and click Rename. 15 Under Visibility. click the Model Categories tab. right-click Callout of Section 2. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. 17 Under Visibility. click Modify. double-click Presentation Section 2. expand the Doors category. under Sections (Callout 1). 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. and clear Elevation Swing. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. clear Visible. under Pattern Overrides. under Sections (Callout 1). 11 In the Rename View dialog.

22 On the View Control Bar.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click The crop regions no longer display. (Hide Crop Region). Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. 20 Click OK. When you select the crop region. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements.

specify the following: Under Shadow. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. 6 In the Name dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. double-click Presentation Section 2. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click . 2 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). in the Project Browser. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. For Contrast. 3 On the View Control Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. In addition. Click Apply.rvt. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. In the steps that follow. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. specify 35. ■ For Sun Position. The shadows do not offer much contrast. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section.

NOTE The line style. specify 70°. and click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. Select Relative to View. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. click OK. click (Shadows On). 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Silhouette Edges. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. For Altitude. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. for Silhouette style. For Azimuth. specify 135°. select Directly. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . was added to this training file for training purposes. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

Presentation. click Add View. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. select Section: Presentation Section 2.rvt. under Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the selected view.

click (Rotate). 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. select Viewport : Presentation. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. and press Enter. click Modify.5 In the Type Selector. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. The section needs to be rotated 180°. Using a clock as a reference. you click to specify the start radius. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. To rotate an object. double-click Section 2. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. under Sections (Callout 1). 9 On the Edit toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. The view title no longer displays. In the steps that follow.

The callout rotates 180°. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sheets (all). Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. double-click A105 . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.Presentation.

and drag it up and to the left as shown. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. After applying the view template to a new section view.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481.

enter Presentation. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Section 1. click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Copy of Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 In the New View Template dialog. under Sections (Type 1). Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. right-click Section 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. 4 In the View Templates dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click OK.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

under Names. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. 14 In the Type Selector.Presentation. select 90° Counterclockwise. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . lighting fixtures. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 Right-click the viewport. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. select Viewport : Presentation. The furniture. for Rotation on Sheet. and elevation swings no longer display. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Sheets (all). Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. under Graphics. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. select Presentation.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. annotations. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click Activate View. click Add View. double-click A105 . and click OK. 12 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. 15 Right-click the viewport.

21 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail. such as a tracery window or a column capital.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484.

as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Type 1). Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Rename. 4 In the Project Browser.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 .rvt. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Section 1. right-click Callout of Section 1. click Callout. After you add the callout. select the callout.

8 Right-click. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. enter Presentation Callout. 7 Select the crop region. and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. double-click Presentation Callout. as shown. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click View Properties.

For Scale Value 1.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 .Presentation. specify 22. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog. select Section: Presentation Callout. click Add View. select Custom. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. select Viewport : Presentation. Click OK. and click Activate View. double-click A105 . Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. click Modify. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet.

and move it to the position shown below. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. and make adjustments as necessary. click Filled Region. click Region Properties. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. When finished. and click Deactivate View. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 23 On the Design Bar. activate the viewport. double-click Presentation Callout. In the steps that follow. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. under Sections (Callout 1). 24 In the Element Properties dialog.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. The composition set for the analytique is now complete.

sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.Presentation. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar.25 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Activate View. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. on the Design Bar. select Solid fill. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. for Fill Pattern. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . 28 In the Project Browser. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . You do not have to replicate the image exactly. under Sheets (all). 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK 3 times. When you are finished. double-click A105 .

The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.31 On the Options Bar. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Finish Sketch. click . and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 34 Select the crop region. 32 On the Design Bar. click (Show Crop Region). and sketch the rectangle shown below. 33 On the View Control Bar.

36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Deactivate View.35 On the View Control Bar. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. click (Hide Crop Region). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson.

3 On the View Control Bar. double-click Isometric. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the View Control Bar. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click the Scale control. click (Shadows Off). Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. and apply shadows to the views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click 1 : 200.

in the list. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. specify 135°. Select Relative to View. for Silhouette style. select Cast Shadows. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 13 In the Project Browser. Select 1st Flr. click . and click OK. 12 In the Rename View dialog. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. For Altitude. select Silhouette Edges. Select Ground Plane at Level. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. specify 45°. For Azimuth. specify 35. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. For Sun Position. and click OK. enter Isometric 2. A section box displays around the building model. and click Rename. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric 2.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. right-click Isometric. 8 In the Name dialog. select Directly. enter Isometric 1. and click Rename. click Duplicate. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Cnst. For Contrast. right-click Isometric 1. under Extents. select Section Box. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. and click OK.

TIP Notice the rotation symbol.19 Select the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . When you are finished. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. as shown. click Modify on the Design Bar.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Isometric 2. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Presentation. under 3D Views. The section box no longer displays. 25 To hide the section box. double-click Isometric 3. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. When you are finished. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. under 3D Views. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Next. right-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. If desired. enter Isometric 3. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. 27 Select the section box. 23 In the Rename View dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . 21 In the Project Browser. you can adjust the plane location. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. make a copy of the view. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Viewport : Presentation. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. under Sheets (all). you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. the stairs and railings may display. 31 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 29 To hide the section box. and click OK. under 3D Views. and click OK. and click Rename. 24 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box.

under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation.32 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. The filled region partially covers the view.

42 Using the drawing tools. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . click Edit/New. 36 On the Design Bar. select Transparent. 39 For Background. select Concrete. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. The image below shows the redrawn lines. click Edit. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. On the Options Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. for Fill Patterns. click Lines. 35 Select the poche filled region. 40 Click OK twice. and click Activate View. click Region Properties. This will make it easier to draw lines. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Design Bar.

50 Proceed with the next exercise. 46 Click OK twice. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.43 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. for Fill Pattern. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid fill. click Finish Sketch. 47 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Region Properties. and click Deactivate View.

3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. double-click 1st Flr. click Camera. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Cnst. you add it to the presentation sheet. a cutaway perspective view. you create the final view for the analytique. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.rvt. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. The view opens immediately. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. then you specify the eye direction and range. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.

for Name. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: Under Shadow. for Silhouette style. click . and click OK. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 On the View Control Bar. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. For Contrast. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 35. select Silhouette Edges. and click OK. For Sun Position.

and click OK. A section box now cuts through the building model. Grips display on each plane of the section box. select Section Box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 .Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. 12 Select the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents.

double-click A105 . 17 Under Model Crop Size. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). for Width. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 19 To hide the section box. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. select Viewport : Presentation. On the Annotation Categories tab. click (Hide Crop Region). 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). 18 On the View Control Bar.14 Select the crop region. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 15 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. under Change. and click OK. click Size. enter 165 mm. you must specify the actual size of the image. In the Type Selector. and click OK.Presentation.

rvt. click OK. click . 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. enter Title. select a font. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. specify a text size of 40 mm. select Text : Title. 10 In the Name dialog. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Name dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . click Duplicate.Presentation sheet is not the active view. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Text. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. click Text. and click OK. select the same font as the title. specify a text size of 6 mm. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. double-click it in the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Description.

16 In the Type Selector.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description. 18 On the Design Bar. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

Once the model has been imported. curtain walls. 507 . You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. such as walls. you create a small building from the front mass form. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. After you import the SketchUp model. In this tutorial. and roofs. that compose the building. you can easily add detail with Revit components.

select SketchUp Files. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. buildings. and click Massing on the context menu that displays.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. and click Save. or select from a list. select All. For Import units. and not in the library. right-click in the Design Bar. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click OK. For Files of type. you create a Revit Architecture project. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Click the Sketchup file. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. Double-click the Common folder. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Colors. 6 In the Save As dialog. click Training Files. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. click Browse. select Auto-Detect. for File name. For Layers. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.skp. click Create Mass. under Template file. enter Import SketchUp. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.rte. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. click OK. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Name dialog. click the Massing tab. visible elements. 9 In the informational dialog. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 4 In the New Project dialog. enter SketchUp Model. select Preserve.

For Place at level. click . ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. click the Close button. and roofs. 14 On the View toolbar. select Manual . 17 In the warning dialog. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. click Finish Mass. 16 On the Design Bar. depending on the complexity of the project. ■ ■ For Positioning. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. Level 1 is the only choice. select Level 1. curtain walls. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.Center. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. In a new project. such as walls. Click Open.

curtain walls. 4 On the Options Bar.18 Proceed to the next exercise. and roofs. click Roof by Face. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. verify Basic Roof: Generic . 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. such as walls. After you create the building from the mass faces. select the face so that it highlights in red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. for Level. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. and on the View Control Bar. that compose the building. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.400mm displays. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. verify Level 2 is selected. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 3 In the Type Selector. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project.

(It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. A roof is created from the mass face.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. click Create Roof. 6 On the Options Bar. on the View toolbar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. on the Options Bar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. To see the new roof. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. click Create Roof. click to display masses. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . 9 On the Options Bar. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. verify that Select Multiple is selected. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active.

14 On the Options Bar.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. click Roof by Face. click Create Roof. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 12 On the Design Bar.

21 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. for Loc Line. select Core Face: Exterior. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Modify to end the command. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . verify Basic Wall: Generic . 22 In the Type Selector. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. to turn off the mass visibility in the view.15 On the Design Bar. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click roofs that you created. click Wall by Face. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 23 On the Options Bar.200mm displays.

click Curtain System by Face. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 28 In the Type Selector. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click to view only the walls and roofs.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 29 Select the left face of the left mass.

Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create System. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 32 On the View toolbar. 31 Using the same technique. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.30 On the Options Bar.

click Create System. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Roof by Face. and on the Options Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. 38 Select the mass face shown below. select the other wall. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Curtain System. click Wall by Face.35 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. and select it. click Create Roof.

click Camera. and select the mass face shown below. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. Below the right corner of the view. double-click Level 1.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face. click to view the building that you have created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 42 On the View toolbar.

click your building in the view. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. roofs. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . to view only the walls. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Click the frame to display its grips. 48 On the View toolbar.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. The perspective view created by the camera displays. specify a point for the camera target. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. as shown.

50 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . for Justification. and select the left curtain system in the view. select Center. Under Grid 1 Pattern. select Center.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. click . Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. click Modify. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Under Grid 2 Pattern. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. for Justification.

59 On the View toolbar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. double-click {3D}. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Door. and move the roof edges as shown below. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . under 3D Views. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Cancel to end the command. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.54 Select each roof to display its grips. double-click 3D View 1. 63 In the Type Selector. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 55 Right-click. 56 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

grid lines. and you can change these elements individually. In the left pane of the Open dialog. panel. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like walls. you create a curtain system using the wall command. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. This affects the entire curtain system. and mullions. to resize the system. 525 . Unlike windows. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Training Files. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. you need to change the length of the wall. You can add curtain systems with the wall command.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you select the grid. and they are not windows.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. To switch panel types. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. For example. or you can use a specific curtain system command. you need to select a panel. Like windows. To change grids.

click Wall. and double-click Ground Floor. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. Creating an Entrance | 527 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.

The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. Click OK. using curtain grids. and room bounding. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. top and base attachments. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. top constraint. and click (Properties). 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. For Top Offset. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. enter 1200.11 Select the curtain system. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel.

25 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. and click OK. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 20 In the drawing area.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. click Elevation. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. right-click Elevation 1 . 18 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. and resize the crop boundary as shown. and click Rename. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Modify. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.a.

click Modify. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. Click to place another grid line. SIXTH FLOOR. and click OK. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. while pressing CTRL. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. Click to create a vertical grid. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 33 On the Design Bar. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. one larger than the other. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard.26 While pressing CTRL. FOURTH FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. select SECOND FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. THIRD FLOOR. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

Next. Instead of using the Door command. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and on the Options Bar. you add a doorway to the curtain system. The segment line style changes to dashed. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Creating an Entrance | 531 . click Add or Remove Segments. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. The two segments are removed. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and then select the segment above it.

40 On the Options Bar. select One Segment. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 42 Place dimensions as shown. click Curtain Grid. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown.38 Using the same method. and lock them. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 39 On the Design Bar.

You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. Creating an Entrance | 533 . click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click in any white space to exit the editor. 43 Delete the dimensions. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. Use the following image as a guide. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels.

These panels schedule as doors. They are part of the curtain panel category. The panel changes to a double door.Next. Now. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 57 On the View Control Bar. click view. on the new curtain system you added. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 52 On the Type Selector. 56 In the Project Browser. . double-click Entrance Elevation. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors.rfa. not as curtain panels. 54 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. under Elevations. and click Wireframe. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 55 In the Project Browser.

64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 61 With the panel still selected. The glazed panels display in blue. 63 Click OK twice. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel.60 On the Type Selector. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click System Panel : Solid. 65 On the View Control Bar. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click . and the solid panels display in white. Creating an Entrance | 535 .

Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 2 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. select Grid Line Segment. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Save As. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 4 On the Options Bar. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.68 On the File menu. select Entire Grid Line.rvt.

Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select All Empty Segments. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. there are a few that you do not want. 10 Delete the mullions below them. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. however. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. You are going to change some mullion joins.6 On the Options Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. so you remove them next. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. because their width reduces the size of the doors. clickModify.

The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .Two mullion join controls display. you can also right-click. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 15 On the Design Bar. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. 17 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 14 Click the top mullion control. click Modify. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. Finally. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Southeast Isometric. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins.

(Arc passing through three points). you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. for Top Constraint. Click OK. For Top Offset. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. you add a curtain system using the wall command. under Floor Plans. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 7 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Wall. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 4 In the Type Selector. Finally. enter 1200.

13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. you place grids on the system. Next. 14 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. Divide the halves into quarters. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. eighths. under Elevations. double-click East. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. and then sixteenths. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

select the bottom layer of panels. click Modify. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . you change some panels in the system. select Basic Wall: Generic . Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.300mm. 16 On the Design Bar. to filter out all 19 Save the file. 18 In the Type Selector. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Next.

11 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. . 12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. for Depth. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. clear Chain. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. click Model Lines. click . and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. select Glass. under Elevations. 4 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click Exterior. and on the Options Bar. and click OK.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter 100. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and click . click Lines. 9 Select the extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser.rft.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . under Floor Plans. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 21 In the Type Selector.Pattern.14 On the Design Bar. and click Change Walls Orientation. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. and save the family as Curtain Panel .rfa family. click 25 On the View toolbar. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. All fourth floor panels are selected.rfa. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. 23 Right-click. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Curtain Panel . 18 Load the Curtain Panel . click (Default 3D View). right-click.Pattern.Pattern. 24 On the View toolbar. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. (SteeringWheels). 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 19 In the Project Browser. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. and return to the project file.

All the panels change to the solid panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 29 In the Type Selector. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. right-click. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.Solid. 30 Save the file. 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. under Floor Plans. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select System Panel . The finished arc wall should look like the following image. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. All fifth floor panels are selected. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise.

. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 8 On the Design Bar. Select Radius. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. double-click East. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. and click OK. click Lines. click Training Files. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Mullion. click ■ ■ For Sides. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Click again to specify the ending point. and enter 50 mm for the radius. select Mullion. 1 In the Project Browser. for Profile Usage. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon).rft. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. enter 8. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . For vertical mullions. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. and select it. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. under Elevations.

23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. it can be added as a mullion type. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click OK. and click Visibility. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .rfa family. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility. and return to the project file. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.11 On the Design Bar. clear Coarse and Medium. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays.rfa. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 19 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 28 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. After the new profile is loaded. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 31 Click . click Mullion. 13 On the Options Bar. click (SteeringWheels). 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 20 Select the detail component.rfa. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. click Modify. clear Fine. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. double-click Southeast Isometric. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion .detail. 27 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Detail Component.

select All Empty Segments. and click OK. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. click Modify. 44 Save the file.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click OK twice. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 36 Under Construction. 40 On the Design Bar. You have placed more mullions than you want. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. so you remove the unwanted ones. 43 Press DELETE. 38 On the Options Bar. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. for Profile. under Floor Plans. 41 In the Project Browser. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 33 Click Edit/New. click Duplicate. right-click. select Circular Mullion for Family.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you learned to create a curved curtain system. TIP To chain select all the walls. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 1 In the Project Browser. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 5 On the Options Bar. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. select Defines slope. a storefront system. In this lesson. and then apply those custom elements to the system. click Pick Walls.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. make custom curtain panels and mullions. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. and a ruled curtain system. and press TAB. All the inside faces highlight. and you can click to select them all. 4 On the Design Bar.

select Entire Grid Line. 16 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. click Roof Properties. double-click Southeast Isometric. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click OK. enter 600. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. 17 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. 18 Save the file.7 On the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 11 On the View Control Bar.

click Wall. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 4 In the Type Selector.Storefront System In this exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and enter 2400. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. select Unconnected for Height. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. 9 On the Design Bar. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For this wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. click Modify. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 10 In the Project Browser. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. under 3D Views.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. and press ENTER. enter 10200 mm. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 12 Select the storefront wall. To see how the grid layout is defined. which is specified in the type. even if the wall height changes. and click . 8 Click the temporary dimension. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. click Edit/New. Storefront System | 551 . the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing.

16 Click OK. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 18 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments. In this exercise. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. Justification. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. click Mullion.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. 19 Select a curtain grid. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. enter 15. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. Angle. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. By setting the Angle value. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 20 Save the file. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. see the Revit Architecture help. or end. and Offset. 1 In the Project Browser. you find Number. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. under 3D Views. center. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. double-click Southeast Isometric.

Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. and highlight the model line. 6 Click the highlighted line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.3 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

8 Select the highlighted line. Next. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 10 Select the panel. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. click Modify. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. and click . Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created.

and then eighths. right-click. select System Panel : Solid. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and define a ruled curtain system. and then eighths. 16 In the Type Selector. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 18 Save the file. Finally. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. quarters. quarters. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves.

556 .

gable. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to create several different types of roofs. mansard. 557 . and low sloped roofs. and soffits to the roofs that you create. shed. and open Metric\m_Roofs. you learn how to add fascia. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. click Training Files. In addition. In this tutorial. In this lesson. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. gutters. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. You do not need to create the work plane. Before you can sketch the roof profile.Roofs 15 In this lesson. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this exercise. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. including hip.rvt.

TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. centerline. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 5 In the Go To View dialog. click the blue square on the witness line. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.1 In the Project Browser. and so on). 4 Click OK. click Ref Plane. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. select Name. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

Next. 13 On the Options Bar. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. sketch the roof profile. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Lines. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane.

Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Next. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . expand Views (all). click Modify. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Type 1). press CTRL. 21 In the Project Browser. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The roof should resemble the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. and then select the exterior face of the wall. and select the second wall. press TAB. 18 Select the edge of the roof. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge.

click model. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.

1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Next. 5 On the Options Bar. and click Yes. sketch the roof footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. click Pick Walls. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. and enter 600 for Overhang. verify that Defines slope is selected. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 .rvt. m_Roofs. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. and double-click Garage Roof. expand Views (all).

enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. click Finish Roof. under Dimensions. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). 11 Press CTRL. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. clear Defines slope. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. select both slope definition lines. 15 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click the model. 8 On the Options Bar. By default. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Next. and click OK. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click Modify.

and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. expand Views (all). click Pick Walls. expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs. clear Defines slope. and double-click Level 3. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.rvt. press TAB. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . and enter 600 for Overhang. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you complete the roof. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 15 On the Options bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 10 On the View menu. click Finish Roof. select Defines Slope.6 Click to select all the walls. Next. add new slope lines to the roof. click Modify. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. sketch the chimney opening. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. select Defines Slope. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 9 Using automatic snaps.

expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. m_Roofs. select Defines slope. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.18 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 .rvt. and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Next. close the roof sketch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. clear Defines Slope. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. click Lines. using the following illustration for guidance. and click (Pick Lines). Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Next. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs .5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. select the left vertical slope definition line. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click (Trim/Extend). verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Next. 14 Under Constraints.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 18 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 16 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. click Modify. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click Roof Properties. click (SteeringWheels). raise the roof 600 mm above the current level.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and click OK. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof.

23 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Next. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).21 Click (SteeringWheels). join the two remaining walls to the roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.

4 On the Options Bar.rvt. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. click Pick Walls. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. select the left vertical roof line. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next. enter 0 for Overhang. clear Defines Slope. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. press TAB. and double-click Level 2. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Trim/Extend).Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 10 To trim the first line segment. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 6 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. m_Roofs. and enter 300 for Overhang. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 .

click Modify. and click OK. 16 Under Constraints. 19 On the View toolbar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.rvt. you add a slope-defining line. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. expand Views (all). 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and press ENTER. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click 20 On the View toolbar.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you add slope arrows to the shed roof. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. m_Roofs. expand 3D Views. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and double-click 3D. select Defines slope. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. (SteeringWheels). 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. Next. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.

and double-click Level 2. To help locate the position of each split. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 4 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. add two new slope arrows. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 5 On the View menu. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click (Pick Lines). and enter 600 for Offset. click Slope Arrow. expand Floor Plans. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 7 On the Options Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. expand Views (all). 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. you need to add two reference planes. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Ref Plane. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. clear Defines Slope. 14 On the Options Bar. Before you can add slope arrows. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. click Modify. 9 On the Tools menu. Next. 11 On the Design Bar.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.

rvt. and then click OK. When eave heights differ. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. expand Views (all). use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. When you sketch a hip roof. click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. expand Floor Plans. and move the cursor to place the arrow. click Edit.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays.15 to add the second slope arrow. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 16 Repeat steps 13 . m_Roofs. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and double-click Garage Roof. and click 19 Under Constraints. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. enter 500 for Rise/1000. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 20 Under Dimensions. select both slope arrows. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (Properties). 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 Press CTRL. the adjacent eave heights must align. select Slope for Specify. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof.

click Save As. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 14 If you want to save your changes. When aligning eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Defines Slope. under Dimensions. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Align Eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. 5 On the Options Bar. select a method to align the eaves. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . on the Options Bar. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. and click OK. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. The eave lines display with a dimension. Next.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. (Properties).

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. click Modify. expand Elevations. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click Training Files. 3 Select the roof and. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. expand Views (all). 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. on the Options Bar. (Properties). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. and double-click North. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser.

7 In the Project Browser.6 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. and select the remaining three lines. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. and then select Defines slope. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click . 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. Next. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. under Dimensions. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 3. click Lines. press TAB. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . and click OK. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Finish Roof.

Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. on the File menu.17 On the View toolbar. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof.rvt. click Save As. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. click Training Files. you add a roof to a building shell. After you add the roof. click mansard roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 20 Proceed to the next exercise.

6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. verify that Defines slope is not selected. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 5 In the drawing area. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Design Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 .

7 On the Tools toolbar. for Type. click Roof Properties. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop.Because the walls are not continuous. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. select Steel Truss . 11 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Roof.EPDM. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.Insulation on Metal Deck . and click OK.

15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. In the next steps. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. and click to select it. The roof has been created. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. double-click the section head to open the section view. double-click Roof. click (Draw Split Lines). under Floor Plans. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 16 On the Options Bar.

18 Move the cursor down. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. move the cursor horizontally to the left.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 20 Using the same method. and select a point on the opposite roof line.

Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. Next. exact placement of the points is not important. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. In this exercise. 23 On the Options Bar. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. (Add points). You modify the points individually. on the Options Bar.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 .

The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. click (Modify Sub-Elements). The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. and press ENTER. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs .24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. enter -2''. for the dimension. 25 Using the same method.

for Elevation.27 Press and hold CTRL. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. and press ENTER. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. and select all of the roof edges. and on the Options Bar. enter 4''. click (Properties). as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. including the interior edges of the roof regions. 31 Select the roof slab.

39 Proceed to the next lesson. click Save As. and soffits. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . gutters. 37 If you want to save your changes. you learn how to create roof fascia. The entire slab is sloped. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. for the Thermal/Air Layer. you can easily create its fascia. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and soffits in Revit Architecture. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 36 View the results in the section view. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and Soffits on page 586. gutters. Gutters. and Soffits In this lesson. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating Fascia. click Edit/New. Gutters. under Construction. After you create a roof. 35 Click OK 3 times. on the File menu. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating Fascia. By making the insulation layer variable. click Edit. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. In some cases this type of slope is desired. select Variable. for Structure.

click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 8 In the Name dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. enter Built-up Fascia. under Construction. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 3 Press CTRL. and open Common\c_Condominium. click (Properties).rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. click Training Files. and click OK. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. and click OK twice. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. and click Open. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.

you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 13 On the Design Bar. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Modify to exit the Fascia command. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. c_Condominium. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters on page 588. 2 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). 14 Proceed to the next exercise.

7 Under Materials and Finishes. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. under Construction. click Duplicate. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. Creating Soffits on page 590. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click Edit/New. and click OK. . click in the Value field for Material. 10 Click to place the gutter. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Gutters | 589 . and click OK three times. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile.3 In the Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.rvt.Creating Soffits In this exercise. expand Views. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Pick Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. and double-click Roof.

6 In the Project Browser. Creating Soffits | 591 . Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 8 Select the roof. 7 On the Tools menu.4 Select the roof. and double-click 3D. and then select the soffit to join them. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). click Join Geometry. click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar.

592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. click Save As.

click Project Units. If you are using metric units. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In the final exercise. 593 . Finally. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and open Common\c_Area. your values will be different.rvt. 2 In the Project Units dialog. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. Click OK. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. select Square meters. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. select mm. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. For Unit Suffix. 3 Under Area. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. under Length. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. click Training Files. select Millimeters. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.

9 Click Cancel. 4 In the Project Units dialog. For Unit Suffix. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. expand Floor Plans. and click Room and Area. the system-computed height defaults to the level. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. select m2. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. click the Area Schemes tab. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. right-click in the Design Bar. click the Room Calculations tab. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. Click OK. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. select 2 decimal places. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. it is not necessary in this exercise. click OK.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. or 0. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click Settings. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. These schemes define spatial relationships.

NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. To modify the area. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. click Area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. forming a closed loop. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. If you select No. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. you must manually add these boundary lines. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. 12 When the informational dialog displays. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. under Views (all). you must select one of the reference lines. click Area Plan. Click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. When you select Yes in this dialog. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. rather than the area tag. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

and store area. When you pick the walls. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Next. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. click Area Plan. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. When you add area boundary lines. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). the area boundary lines do not update automatically. If you do not select this option. common areas. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Click OK. click Area Boundary. 21 On the Options Bar. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you can either draw them or pick them. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall.

24 In the upper left corner of the building model. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 25 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click Modify. and click to select the area. click ■ ■ . click Area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Options Bar.23 On the Design Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag.

32 On the Options Bar. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. click Area.■ Click OK. click Modify and select the area. Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. In the Element Properties dialog. 31 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 29 On the Design Bar.

36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. and select Store Area for Area Type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. enter Core for Name. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 35 Add an area to the building model core. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.■ Click OK. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 .

2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. name the project Area-in progress.Notice that within the two store areas. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In the next exercise.rvt. and click to place the legend. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. and click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Color Scheme Legend. 37 On the File menu. click Save. In this exercise.

under Category.3 When the dialog displays. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. and click OK. select Area Type and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 7 Under Available fields. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. select Areas (Rentable).

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

floor. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. floors. and floors. You assign the default wall.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. and perimeter information. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. or both. volume. At any time. you then need to update the building face. In this tutorial. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. 603 . you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. building elements. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. roofs. If you modify a massing face. you can specify the view to display massing elements. After you make building elements. curtain systems. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. and roofs. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. After creating mass floors.

sweeps.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. click Create Mass. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. and cutting geometry. and click Massing.rvt. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

double-click Level 1. and click . click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. and click OK. select Mass (Opaque). for Name. 15 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). click Lines. and click OK. (Line). 8 On the Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. enter 1550 mm. 13 On the View toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. under Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. (Pick Lines). click Extrusion Properties. click the value for Material. and on the Options Bar. enter 25000. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. for Offset. click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Materials dialog. under Floor Plans. click 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. for Extrusion End. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted.

enter 25000.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 25 On the Design Bar. double-click West. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . for Extrusion Start. The second form is on top of the first form. under Materials and Finishes. under Constraints. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. 26 In the Project Browser. TIP If necessary. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). 21 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 28 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. and click OK. double-click {3D} to see the results. for Extrusion End. click the value for Material. enter 27500. select Mass (Transparent). Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Materials dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. click Finish Sketch. and click . and click OK. under Views (all). click Extrusion Properties. press TAB to highlight the entire face. highlight the larger form. 30 In the drawing area. select Pick a plane.

34 On the Options Bar. click (Arc passing through three points). click (Draw). 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. (Pick Lines). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . click Lines. Next. and on the Options Bar. and clear Chain. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 37 On the Options Bar.31 Click to select the face. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and click to select the line start point. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown.

(Line). 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click the arrow next to the drawing options. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. on the Options Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 39 On the Design Bar.TIP If you do not see this option. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . and delete the vertical construction line. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click Lines and. click Edit Top. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. double-click East. 41 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. click (Move). under Views (all). 46 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Project Browser.

54 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Blend Properties. 53 On the View toolbar. 52 On the Design Bar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. click (Default 3D View). and that -92000 is specified for Second End.48 On the Options Bar. 50 On the Design Bar. click 49 Create an arc as shown. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. In this exercise. In the next exercise. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. (Arc passing through three points). verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. for Material.

When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 10 On the Options Bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 7 Using the same technique. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right.rvt. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. click (Line). and select Chain. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. double-click Level 1. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 9 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options bar. click Lines. 1 In the Project Browser.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. select the mass. under Views (all). as shown. m_Massing_Start. under Floor Plans. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click Ref Plane. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar.

click Extrusion Properties. When sketching each extrusion. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. click (Default 3D View). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. on the View Control Bar. In this exercise. enter 0. 13 On the Design Bar. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 14 Under Constraints. 15 Click OK. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. snap the corners to the intersections. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 17 On the View toolbar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. for Extrusion End.

rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. ■ For the radius. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Massing_Start. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing .NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. and click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. click Sketch 2D Path. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select a point below the mass elements. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar.

The only way to align these elements is visually. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 8 On the Design Bar. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . click Profile 1. 11 On the Options Bar. and click Edit. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. as shown. click (Rectangle). click Lines.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. 10 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. click (Default 3D View).

click (Align).) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. 17 Using the same method. 15 On the Design Bar. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. and press ESC. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc.13 On the Tools toolbar. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click Finish Profile. click Profile 2.

22 Click OK twice. click <By Category>. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Profile.18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 23 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Swept Blend. click Swept Blend Properties. and click . select Mass (Transparent).

you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. click Finish Mass. you create new family types from a mass family file. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. Finally. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. In this exercise. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. You then load that mass family file and others into a project.24 On the Design Bar. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.rvt. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing .

and click Apply. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 6 For Width. and for Name. and for Name. enter 18000 mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. 2 In the Family Types dialog. for Depth. 3 In the Name dialog. and click Apply. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply. and click OK. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. click Family Types. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 9000 mm. enter 11000 mm. for Height. for Depth. enter 46000mm. enter 6000 mm. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. enter 12000 mm. for Height.rfa. enter 68000 mm. 9 Click OK. 5 Click New. for Height. click New.rfa. and click OK. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. In this exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. click Training Files. 7 Click New. for Width. under Other. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 18000 mm. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . enter 15000mm. for Depth. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 8 For Width.

TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families.rfa. as shown. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa family files. 1 If not already selected. Semi Barrel Vault. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Site. under Views (all). (Show Mass) to show the massing model.rfa. click Place Mass. You also load other existing mass families and place them. click Training Files. and Triangle. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 6 Open the Box-Training. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. on the View toolbar. Arc Dome. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under Floor Plans.

21 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. click Place Mass. 20 In the Type Selector. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Transparent). select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. select the 3 boxes. 24 On the Design Bar. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 23 On the Options Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 90 for Angle. click Modify. click Place Mass.10 On the Design Bar. select the triangle. 11 Select the box. as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. 17 Press CTRL. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 25 In the drawing area. click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. and click to place the mass. and on the Options Bar.

28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . specify Mass (Opaque). and click (Element Properties). 33 On the View toolbar. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. specify Mass (Transparent). click Place Mass. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.26 Select the triangle. for the Material parameter. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. click (Default 3D View).

you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join these mass elements.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. click (Default 3D View). the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. NOTE When you join geometry. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.rvt file. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. (Join Geometry). click 2 On the Tools toolbar. In the next exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.

under Views (all). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 4 Select the triangle. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. double-click Site. click (Mirror).3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. on the Edit toolbar.

and snap to the midpoint of the edge. click (Draw). enter SM.8 On the Options Bar. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. and then select the triangle. as shown. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 17 Press ESC to see the result. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. click (Default 3D View). 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. for Axis. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. (Join Geometry). Joining Mass Elements | 623 . click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.

click (Add to Design Option Set).rvt. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. 2 On the Window menu. you joined mass elements together. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. (If Design Options is already selected. and select the triangle mass element.In this exercise. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. 1 On the Design Bar. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. do not clear the check mark. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. click Modify.

18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. and click OK twice. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the drawing area. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. click Modify. select Rotate after placement. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 .4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). specify Mass (Transparent). select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 17 In the Type Selector. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. clear Curved. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. and click OK. click Place Mass. under Floor Plans. click Place Mass. and click (Element Properties). enter 90. for Angle. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. for the Material parameter. 13 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. select Sloped (primary). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

click (Add to Design Option Set). select the three arc domes. under 3D Views. clear Sloped. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. select Curved. double-click North. double-click {3D}. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. under Views (all). Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 22 In the Project Browser. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. and watch the status bar. 20 In the drawing area. 23 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. TIP To find the correct shapes.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Views (all). 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. and click OK. and click OK twice. 28 In the Project Browser. While pressing CTRL. specify Mass (Transparent). move the cursor over shapes in the drawing.

click (Design Options). 35 On the File menu. and click OK. 33 In the Design Options dialog. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. click the Design Options tab. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. In this exercise. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. select Curved and. under Option. and click Close.rvt. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 31 Click the value for Design Option. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. select Curved from the Design Option menu.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Make Primary. you can make it the primary option. 34 Close the warning that displays. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 .

6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. click Training Files. and for Loc Line. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. select Wall Centerline. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 In the Type Selector. click (Pick Faces). TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. you pick massing faces to create walls. 2 On the View toolbar. under Views (all).rvt.Brick on CMU. click Wall by Face. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . double-click Level 1. 16 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 3. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 5. under Views (all). 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Wall by Face. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. under Views (all).

under Views (all). double-click Level 9. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry.18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. If desired. 19 In the Project Browser. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping.

click Modify. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. perimeter. 8 On the Design Bar. When you select levels. and click OK. double-click {3D}. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. and exterior surface area. 4 Click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. select all levels. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area.In this exercise. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . 6 On the Options Bar. clear Curtain Panels. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. click Mass Floors.rvt. Curtain Systems. volume. and Walls. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass.

9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 10 Press CTRL. 11 On the Options Bar. select Levels 1-4. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Mass Floors. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify.

The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. click Mass Floors. select Level 1. and click OK. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step).14 On the Options Bar. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . 15 Press CTRL. 16 On the Options Bar.

add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 4 Using the same method.rvt. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. press and hold SHIFT. and select Level.In this exercise. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. and click OK. under Category. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. Floor Volume. select Mass Floor. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Floor Perimeter. select Floor Area. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). and click Add. The Floor Area. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. enter Retail. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. select Mass: Family and Type. for Sort by. for Usage. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. and click OK.

636 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Move Up until Usage is listed first. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. and click Remove. and click Properties. for Fields. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 With Usage selected. select Mass: Family and Type.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. under Scheduled fields (in order). under Other. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Edit. 14 Select Level. After you assign usage.

Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. 16 On the Formatting tab. and select Grand totals. in the field under Filter by. click Edit. select Level. for Sort by. 27 Click OK twice. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and in the field below. 23 In the Rename View dialog. select Usage. for Filter. elevation. and click OK. 18 On the Filter tab. for Then by. and click Properties. 22 In the Project Browser. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. and click OK. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Hotel. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. and click Rename. and plan views. under Fields. select Floor Area. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). under Other. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 24 In the Project Browser. under Other.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. for Field formatting. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click OK twice. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. select Calculate totals. for Filter by.

you pick massing faces to create roofs. you created mass floor schedules.rvt. by level. under Views (all). The mass floor schedules list. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Roof by Face. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing .In this exercise. double-click {3D}. floor perimeter. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. the floor area. 1 In the Project Browser.

NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.4 In the Type Selector. click Create Roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 5 On the Options Bar. select Basic Roof : Generic .400mm. click Create Roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . Your model should now look as shown.

select Curtain Panels. in the Type Selector. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. 12 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. select Sloped Glazing. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 13 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise.8 Using the method you just learned. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. In this exercise. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. and click OK. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . Curtain Systems. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System by Face. 4 On the Options Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. double-click {3D}. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create System. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. 5 Press CTRL. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . 3 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. under Views (all).

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Using the same method. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the blended form on the in-place mass.

10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create System. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). Creating Curtain Systems | 643 .9 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method.

12 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . you change the size of an existing mass family.

for Width. clear Curtain Panels. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. Curtain Systems. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 7 On the Options Bar. Roofs. clear Exclude Design Options. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and Walls. Floors. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30000. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 2 On the View menu. Next. under Views (all). 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. click Visibility/Graphics. 6 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties).1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. and then click OK. click Modify. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 .

646 | Chapter 17 Massing . you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 12 On the View Control Bar. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. In the next steps. under Floor Plans. under Views (all).

17 Select the roof as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). you want to select the smaller one. click Remake. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click OK. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront.TIP To select the curtain wall. Also.

click Remake. and click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.18 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .

Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. 1 Open the 3D view. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Schedules/Quantities.rvt. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar.

8 Click None to clear the selection. 4 Rename the view 3D . click All to select all categories. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 On the Model Categories tab. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.Massing only.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 9 Select Mass. right-click {3D}. 3 In the Project Browser.

This concludes the massing tutorial.In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . to the building shell. such as columns and an extruded roof. If desired. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. You might create the model shown.

652 .

you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. By grouping objects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Creating. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. When you make changes to a nested group. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can also nest groups within other groups. Modifying. For example. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. all instances in the building model are updated. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. 653 . It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. hotel rooms. you add the new model group to a previously created group. the host group is also updated automatically. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. you also simplify the modification process. You mirror one instance of the group. After you create a model group. place. you not only simplify their placement. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. and typical office layouts. and Nesting Groups In this lesson.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. In this exercise. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. In this tutorial. and modify repetitive units. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. The new group is considered nested within the host group. In another exercise. or with those working on a different project.

rvt. 2 Click in the drawing area.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . enter ZR. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. and double-click First Floor. expand Floor Plans. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. click Training Files.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. enter Typical Kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 .

click Modify. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping .Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. 7 On the Design Bar.

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. under Groups. and click Create Instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. click Modify. right-click Typical Kitchen.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. clear Copy. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror).

click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

one mirrored. and one rotated. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. When you finish editing. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. press TAB to highlight the wall. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.rvt. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group In this exercise. you make changes to an instance of a group. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group | 661 . and click to select it. click Save As. and click Save.

). and click to select the door. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. press TAB. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE To display an excluded element. select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. click Modify. 7 Click (Group Member. press TAB.). and click member to group instance.). 8 On the Design Bar. and click to select the wall. 4 Move the cursor over the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.3 Click (Group Member.). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

clear Tag on Placement. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 14 In the Type Selector.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. select Basic Wall : Generic . 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. move the cursor to the left. click Wall. 12 On the Design Bar.127mm. Modifying a Group | 663 . 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 10 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance.

the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 21 On the Options Bar. move the cursor up. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the drawing area. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style.17 On the Design Bar. In edit group mode. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Modify. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. click Edit Group. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.

which acts as the host. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Finish.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Select the opening. under Constraints. 29 On the group editor toolbar. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. enter 1000. (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. Nesting Groups In this exercise. enter 2134. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click OK. created in an earlier lesson. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Nesting Groups | 665 . All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Modify. click 28 For Base Offset. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Unconnected Height.

Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. under Floor Plans. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 5 In the drawing area. click (Add to Group). click Edit Group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . double-click First Floor.rvt. select the Typical Kitchen group. 4 On the group editor toolbar. in the Project Browser. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

9 Select the 2 bedroom group. double-click Second Floor. select the wall between the folding doors. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 667 . and each of the bifold doors. click Finish.6 Press TAB. 7 On the group editor toolbar.

you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. and filled regions. such as door and window tags. you add door tags to a group. under Floor Plans. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. such as text. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. double-click First Floor. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.rvt. In the next exercise. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model.

and select a point below the left elevator. click to draw a rectangular region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.

and on the Design Bar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 12 Enter Tile. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and select the text note and the filled region. as shown. click (Group). click Text. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. and click OK. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 14 On the Edit toolbar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 16 In the drawing area. click to add an arc leader.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. under Groups. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Floor Plans. Because the detail group contains variables. 22 On the Design Bar. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.18 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . 21 In the drawing area. double-click Second Floor. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 20 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. expand Detail. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.

rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. as shown. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. clear Leader. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 5 On the Design Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.manner that a drawing component can be added.

click (Group). 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Check None. 8 In the Filter dialog. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Door Tags. and click OK. for Attached Detail Group Name. 11 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). double-click Second Floor. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans.

click Modify. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. therefore. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. click Place Detail. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you load the group from the library into a new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 16 On the Design Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. In this case. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and expand Model. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. for Create new. click OK. A warning dialog displays. and click Open.rvt. click Modify. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. and click Create Instance. and click Save Group. expand Groups.rvt. verify that Same as group name is selected. click Desktop. under Groups\Model. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Save. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. verify that Project is selected. 12 On the Design Bar. accept the default template file. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 3 For File name. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. browse to the Desktop.

21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Training Files. click Use Existing. and on the Options Bar.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Bind. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 In the message dialog. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. and the link is removed. When a group is converted to a link. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 17 On the Design Bar. click Remove Link. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. select the linked Revit model. and click OK. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Revit Links. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click OK. click Modify. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog.rvt. click Link. verify that Attached Details is selected only.

islands. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. convert the data to a table. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. You add property lines manually. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. 677 . you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. and walkways. and then modify the data. you add a building pad to the site. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. Using Site Tools In this lesson.Site 19 In this tutorial. In the final exercises.

2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. This project file was created using the default metric template.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. click Training Files. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . you create a toposurface using two different methods. 3 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. and click Site. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. click Point. Using the first method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Site. and open Metric\m_First_Project.rvt. In the second part of this exercise. expand Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.

Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Use the following illustration as a reference.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.

click Site Settings. 12 On the Settings menu. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . and 18000mm absolute elevations. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. enter 1500mm. click Finish Surface. and click OK. under Increment. 13 In the Site Settings dialog.8 On the Options Bar. under Additional Contours. 11 On the Design Bar. 12000mm. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 15000mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour.

Before importing the contour data. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . and press ENTER. click (Default 3D View). and double-click South. 14 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. 15 On the View Control Bar. click to view it at various angles. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 18 In the Project Browser. enter 1000mm. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click the elevation value. 19 On the Design Bar. modify the level names and elevations. on the Standard toolbar. (SteeringWheels). expand Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). click to delete it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify.

rename the level Basement. it is considered an import symbol. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. under Views (all). 30 On the Edit menu. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . 28 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. Click Open. and click OK. double-click Site. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. For Colors. 24 In the Project Browser. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 23 Click the Level 1 text. select Specify. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Until it is exploded.21 Click the Level 2 text. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. rename the level Base Site Elevation. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Yes. 29 Select the imported topography. click Pin Position. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. click Modify. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. click Training Files. For Layers. under Floor Plans. select Preserve.

31 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 36 On the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click Modify. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. when the edges highlight. 32 On the View menu. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. click Toposurface. clear C_INDX. When you select the import symbol. click the Annotation Categories tab. and then click OK. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear Elevations. 34 Under Visibility. select it. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 40 On the View toolbar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. and click Save. click (Default 3D View). 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 39 On the Design Bar.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. this project file is required in its current state. Using the second method. Adding Property Lines on page 684. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click (SteeringWheels). name the project Site-in progress. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 42 On the View toolbar. you add property lines using two methods. Using the first method. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.rvt. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. click Finish Surface.

click Lines. On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. and click OK. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Property Line. double-click Site. Select and delete the right vertical line. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Adding Property Lines | 685 . Site-in progress. click Lines. do so before continuing. select Create property lines by sketching. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Click Modify. If you have not completed the previous exercise.rvt. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first.

■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. click 12 On the Design Bar. click OK. to delete them. click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. add an arc line on the right. click Property Line. when they highlight. select Edit Table. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 In the warning dialog. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. A warning dialog is displayed. 8 On the Options Bar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. on the Standard toolbar. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. select the lines.

The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. If the gap is not closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 19 In the Tags dialog. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click to place the property lines. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 16 Click OK. 15 Starting in Row #1. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference.14 In the Property Lines dialog. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Adding Property Lines | 687 . Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data.

you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click Training Files. 30 On the View Control Bar. In the final step. and click OK. click the Imported Categories tab. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. this project file is required in its current state. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. The tags display more prominently in this view. 22 In the Tags dialog. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . click Tag ➤ By Category. In this exercise. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 27 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 25 Under Visibility. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. Before adding property line segment tags. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. clear Leader. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. In the next exercise. click to place it. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. you created two sets of property lines. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 23 On the View menu.20 Click Load. and click Drafting.dwg and click OK. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Under Line Pattern. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. under Contour Line Display. Under Range Type. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. 2 On the Settings menu. enter 1000. for Subcategory. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Site Settings. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select Single Value.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. select a shade of Brown. 10 Under Additional Contours. select Topography. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation.0mm.rvt. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. 7 Click OK. select Working Contour. Site-in progress. Under Line Color. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. enter the name Working Contour. Under Subcategory. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. click Object Styles. and click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. click New. select Dash dot. In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar.

12 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the next exercise. In this exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory.11 Click OK. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. and islands. you create topographic subregions to define roads. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. you create subregions in order to define roads. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. and islands. such as material. The next exercise requires a new training file. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . parking areas. The object style subcategory. Working Contour.

rvt. try to replicate the location and proportion. and open Metric\m_Site. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . click Subregion. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Although the exact dimensions are not important. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Lines. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.

and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes.Tarmacadam for Name. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. click Properties. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter Parking for Name. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 6 In the Materials dialog. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . and click to open the Materials dialog. click Finish Sketch. select Site . you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. click the value for Material. under Identity Data.NOTE In the Metric training file.

You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. As you create new subregions. expand Schedules/Quantities. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . 14 On the Options Bar.9 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar.Tarmacadam. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. and double-click Topography Schedule. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Floor Plans. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. click Edit Boundary. they display within this schedule. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each.

under Schedules/Quantities. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. click Subregion. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 17 On the View Control Bar. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. double-click Site. click Lines.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 22 On the Design Bar. Delete overlapping lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. In this training project. Within each subregion. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the project area has increased. 16 On the Design Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser.

26 In the Materials dialog. click the value for Material. 24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click to open the Materials dialog. under Identity Data.Grass for Name. click Properties. 28 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.23 In the upper-right parking area. select Site . Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the View Control Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. enter Island .Grass for Name. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule.

and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ .31 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island Grass. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. click Subregion. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Name the subregion Walkway.Grass. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . 35 On the Design Bar. and apply the material Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately.walkway. 34 On the Design Bar. click Lines. double-click Site.

so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. double-click Topography Schedule. there is still only one toposurface. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . Notice that the schedule has been updated.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. 38 In the Project Browser. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. 37 On the Design Bar.

41 Proceed to the next exercise. When you use the grading tool. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Floor Plans. and click Save. 2 Select the toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. this project file is required in its current state. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. double-click Site.rvt.

Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. select Existing for Phase Created. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 6 On the Design Bar. click Graded Region.3 On the Options Bar. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. under Phasing. and click OK. click (Element Properties). 7 In the Graded Region dialog. select Copy Internal Points. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . see the tutorial. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 5 On the Design Bar. Using Phasing on page 761. 8 Select the topographic surface. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. and click Select and Edit. A warning dialog is displayed.

10 Press DELETE.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

demolished. and new.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 11 On the View Control Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

click Point.13 Press DELETE. 18 On the View toolbar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 15 On the Options Bar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Finish Surface. 19 On the View Control Bar. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 17 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

only the original toposurface displays. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. click View Properties. When you add a building pad. click View Properties. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. and delete it. click to view it at various angles. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. specify New Construction for Phase. you can delete it. specify Existing for Phase. under Phasing. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. under Phasing. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. 24 On the View menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Only the graded topography displays. Therefore. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. (SteeringWheels). 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a building pad. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. this project file is required in its current state.20 On the View toolbar. 23 Select the toposurface. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. and click OK. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.

4 On the Design Bar. If you have an existing building model. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Finish Sketch. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE By default. the Pick Walls command is active. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Lines.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . click Pad. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click (Default 3D View). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 On the View toolbar. Notice the new building pad. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 9 On the View toolbar.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. Adding Site Components on page 706. this project file is required in its current state. 7 On the View Control Bar. click (SteeringWheels).

2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector.90 deg.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. click Parking Component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . and select the parking space.Adding Site Components In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.

Adding Site Components | 707 . 8 On the View toolbar. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. click (Default 3D View).

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 12 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. Notice the new parking spaces. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . click (SteeringWheels).9 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. choose any tree type. click Site Component.

15 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. In the following illustration. Adding Site Components | 709 . the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 14 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

and click Apply. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. under Floor Plans. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. click Hidden Line. click Apply. 710 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 5 On the View menu. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Site tutorial-in progress. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Tag All Not Tagged.

8 On the Options Bar. outside of the site. Click again to the left to position the leader.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. as shown: 10 Using the same method. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. to position the shoulder of the leader. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . In the following exercise. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Click up and to the left. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance.

13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive.

Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . click Modify. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.■ Clear Leader. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. 14 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

4 Under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and under Heading. select Mark. select Type. 11 On the Window menu. Site tutorial-in progress. 5 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. select Mark. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 8 Under Fields. 10 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and click Add. 13 In the Parking Schedule. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . select Parking for Category. The parking schedule is displayed. 9 On the Window menu. under Space. click Schedule/Quantities. double-click Site.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces.rvt. enter Size. 12 In the Site plan. and under Heading. 7 Under Fields. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. and click Add. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. If necessary. click Close Hidden Windows. number the first three spaces consecutively. and click OK. under Floor Plans. select Type. click Tile. enter Space.

This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 14 In the Parking Schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. under Space.

716 .

doors. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you specify an active workset. A workset is a collection of building elements. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. you must first enable Worksharing. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. use Element Borrowing. they cannot make changes to it. You can enable Worksharing for any project. you can select which worksets are open or closed. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. such as annotations and dimensions. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. floors. In this tutorial. Working in a shared project In a shared project. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. stairs. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. go to the Worksets dialog. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. called Worksharing. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. and click Editable. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. When you are working on a shared project. and so on. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Using Worksharing. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. After the project is shared. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. To make a workset editable. All other team members can view this workset. however. such as walls. Elements specific to a view. select the desired workset.

Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You should have at least one workset for each person. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. In a multi-story structure. not including the Project Standards. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Shared Levels and Grids. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. In the next exercise. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. When setting up Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. for a typical project. In the lessons and exercises that follow. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. In most projects. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. After learning the fundamentals. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Experience has shown that. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance.dialog. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Instead. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. and View worksets. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. such as a tenant interior.

Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. For example. When you create a new workset. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. On this tab. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. with each assigned a specific functional task. Regardless of the default setting. As new members create worksets for their own use. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. designers work in teams. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. if a workset named Interior was created. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Team member roles Typically. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. When creating the new worksets. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project.

The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. As you work. This makes them available to other team members. Generally. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you make that workset editable by you. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. When finished or at regular intervals. you should then save to your local file. After saving to the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . When you save locally (to your local file). no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. however. This is called “Selective Open. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. the file is saved as the central file. proceeds as usual. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. within the local file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you can select which workset is active. On the Options Bar. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. your changes propagate to the entire team. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. your changes are saved. However. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. When you save to the central file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Therefore.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. When you save to the central file. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team.

You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. In the next exercise. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. In this instance. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. save to the central file. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. using VPN. To do this. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. In this situation. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. and then save the local file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. Alternatively. and make that workset editable. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. reload the latest changes from the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. for instance. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. When working remotely. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. make any required worksets editable. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you should check out the Materials workset.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. In this conceptual exercise. you work no differently then you would in the office. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file.

2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. The Worksets dialog displays. and open Common\c_Worksets. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. and notice all are editable by you. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Your username displays as the present owner. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. click Worksets. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.rvt. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. under Show. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. When you enable worksharing. 3 In the Worksets dialog. click Training Files." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .

10 Enter Furniture Layout. clear Families. expand Views (all). This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". select Workset1. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and click OK. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Project Standards. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. clear Visible by default in all views. 11 In the Worksets dialog. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. For training purposes. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. and Views. you can rename the default workset. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. it is better to make them visible by default. 16 In the drawing area. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. You do. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 12 Click Rename. In this training file. 14 In the Worksets dialog. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 13 In the Rename dialog. For example. click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. a small number of team members are working on the building model. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. click . Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. click New. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. In this simple training project. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Only User-Created worksets should display. and double-click Level 1. currently named Workset1. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. imagine four users including yourself. another is assigned the interior layout. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. ■ 5 Under Show. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. When you initially activate Worksharing. expand Floor Plans. however. Therefore. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 9 Click New. In this case. 8 Click OK. under Identity Data. type the name Exterior Shell. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior.

select Interior Layout for Workset.19 Click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and walls. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 21 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View menu. click the Worksets tab. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click Visibility/Graphics. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. including the interior doors. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. stairs. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Identity Data. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 20 Select one of the interior walls. click . You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click . 29 Click OK. under Identity Data.

This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. and click OK.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click Worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 44 On the File menu. click Non Editable. 41 In the Worksets dialog. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Level 2. you enabled Worksharing on a project. click Save As. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. 32 Select Interior Layout. 35 On the Options Bar. 42 On the right side of the dialog. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. Now that you have created the central file. 39 Click Save. In this exercise. under Identity Data. 30 On the View menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. select Interior Layout for Workset. make sure you remember the location of this central file. and click OK. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 43 Click OK. under Views (all). Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . 34 In the drawing area. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Close. 33 In the Project Browser. If any interior elements remain. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 38 In the Save As dialog. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. under Floor Plans. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click the Worksets tab. click Visibility/Graphics. click . You then created the central file and checked in all worksets.

and double-click Level 1. select Interior Layout for Name. 6 On the File menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and select Yes for Editable. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. make modifications to the building model. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. select the central file. In addition.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 4 Click Open. click Options. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 12 Click OK. Before working on the model. Next. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. You have created a local file which is for your use only. In this case. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click Save As. select Interior Layout. and click Save. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. If you have not yet completed the exercise. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 7 In the Save As dialog. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 8 In the File Save Options dialog. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 15 In the Project Browser. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Open. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 13 On the Window menu. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. expand Views (all). and select Specify. check out worksets. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. you create your local file. click Worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. please do so before continuing. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. and click OK. 2 In the Open dialog. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. select all the User-Created worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset.

The upper exterior wall should still be selected. Because this element is not owned by another user. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . In this case. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. click Modify. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. however. notice the Editable Only option. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. click . 19 In the Element Properties dialog. you can still edit this wall. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Verify that it is cleared. click Worksets.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. and click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 Click OK. 24 Click OK. In the Worksets dialog. under Identity Data. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 On the File menu. If it was owned by another user. On the Options Bar. click . If this is selected. 20 Under Constraints.

28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. click Modify. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 31 On the Design Bar. 26 Delete the door. The precise location is not important. 29 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior . 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 34 In the Type Selector. click Wall. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner.126mm Partition (2-hr). and modify the length so that the corridor is open.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. In addition. click Save to Central. save to central. Throughout the process. a tooltip. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. You modified the building model. and save locally immediately afterward. At the end of a work session. you created your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. each user must check out worksets. you should relinquish all worksets. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . In this particular case. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. When working in your local file. please do so before continuing. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. If you have not yet completed these exercises. it is recommended. which matches the information in the Status Bar. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. checked out worksets. two users access the central file through a network connection. Borrowed Elements is selected. displays the workset as well as the element type. For training purposes. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. In this exercise. and reload the latest changes. By default. you should perform regular saves. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Whenever you save. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. leave this file open in its current state. make elements editable. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in.

skip the following section. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 12 In the Save As dialog. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). This file is for your use only. return to the Settings dialog. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. click Open. You now have a local copy of the project. This is a system setting. and click Save. 9 Click Open. click Options. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 15 On the File menu. enter User 2. under Username. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. In the following section of this exercise. specifically sequenced. one user has already created a local file. and proceed to Creating a local copy. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Options. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and click OK. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. User 2: Create a local file. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. For training purposes. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. 4 Click the General Tab and. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 7 In the Open dialog. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and reset the Username to your computer login name. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. consider that person to be User 1. In addition. 3 On the Settings menu. 13 In the File Save Options dialog.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. click Save As. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2.rvt. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and select Specify. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and select Yes for Editable. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. click Worksets. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. select the central file. instructions are staggered. and click OK. 11 On the File menu. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. select all the User-Created worksets. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog.

User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. select the lower exterior wall. 24 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. If it is not open. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. modify the building model.” 29 Click OK. User 1: Check out worksets. 23 Click OK. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. click Worksets. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. click Save to Central. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. expand Floor Plans. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. expand Views (all). 19 On the File menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 17 Click OK. If you only have one workset checked out. open it now. 27 On the File menu. it becomes the active workset. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide.You are now the owner of that workset. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and double-click Level 1.

any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. However. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 42 Select Furniture Layout. Because you now have more than one workset checked out.” 39 Click OK. you should create a furniture plan view. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. User 1: Reload latest worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Yes for Editable. under Floor Plans. Before adding any furniture. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Save to Central. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. right-click Level 1. click Reload Latest.” 35 Click OK. 41 On the File menu. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. and click OK. and click Rename. and click OK. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. The changes User 2 made are apparent. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. click Worksets. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 46 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. under Floor Plans. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 37 On the File menu.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 33 On the File menu. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. Click Yes. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 43 In the Project Browser. click Save to Central. When you save to central.

click Modify. and click OK.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click the Worksets tab. click Reload Latest. click Edit/New. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset.” 55 Click OK. 62 On the File menu. 61 Click OK 2 times. such as Wall Types. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. rather than Families. 49 On the Design Bar. 50 On the View menu.200mm. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. are placed under Project Standards. click Component. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . choose any desk. select Project Standards. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 65 Click OK. 60 In the Rename dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 53 On the File menu. and click OK. under Show. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 66 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Save to Central. and click inside any room. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Rename. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 48 In the Type Selector. Therefore. click Save to Central. click Worksets. and click Element Properties. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 63 In the Worksets dialog. the Visible by default option was not selected. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. NOTE System families. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. enter Exterior Wall .

Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. leave this file open in its current state. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Checking out worksets. and published their changes back to the central file. In the final exercise of this tutorial. This exercise requires two users and. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. User 1: Reload latest. select Reload Latest. 3 In the Save As dialog. select Save to Central. and still have your local files open. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. 70 On the File menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. finished the previous workset exercises. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Each user checked out worksets. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. and save 69 On the File menu. At the appropriate point in this exercise. As each of you work. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Each user must have network access to the central file. modified the building model. click Options. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location.rvt. you need to set up your central and local files. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. leave this file open in its current state. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. click Save As. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Training Files. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. There are specific instructions for each user. you save the training file as a central file. and these problems are rectified. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. throughout this training. select the following. In subsequent steps.

■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and click Save. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and click OK. and click OK. 6 On the File menu. click Options. click Options. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and select Specify. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. On the Settings menu. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 13 In the Open dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 17 On the File menu. This is a system setting. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Next. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. The central file should still be open. 15 Click Open. click Open. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Options. In addition. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. This is the local file for User 1. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click Save. 5 Click Save. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. return to the Settings dialog. 12 On the File menu. click Save As. 8 In the Save As dialog. select Make this a Central File after save. 18 In the Save As dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Save As. select the central file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Set the Username to User 2. and click OK.

30 On the left exterior wall. You are now the owner of that workset. select Interior Layout. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. After you submit the request. and click Open. and select Yes for Editable. At this point. and then click OK. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and select Yes for Editable. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. click the File menu. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. select them. click Worksets. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 29 On the Options Bar.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. select Exterior Shell. and click Editing Requests. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 22 In the Worksets dialog. and then click OK. select the second window from the top. double-click Level 1. 26 In the Worksets dialog. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. under Floor Plans. 27 Under Active Workset. 24 Under Active Workset. Afterwards. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. select the Interior Layout workset. click Worksets. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. verify that Editable Only is cleared. You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu.

34 In the Editing Requests dialog. In this case. and close 39 On the File menu. 35 Click Grant. and notice the window is in the new location. 38 Click OK. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. A message informs you that your request has been granted. select the following. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and click OK. select Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. click Close. 36 Click Close. click Check Now. and the other user granted it. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. to Local. select the request submitted by User 2. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . you requested permission to edit the element.

738 .

you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). Using design options. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. For example. 739 . you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you can have multiple sets of design options. In this tutorial. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. After you and the client agree on the final design. The client has asked you to create various options. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In this particular case. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In addition. At any time in the design process.

and open Metric\m_Urban_House. therefore. With the second option. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. After you create a design option. you can edit it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set.rvt. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise.In the first exercise in this lesson. make your final design decision. TIP In this exercise. click Training Files. In the second exercise. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. click Edit Selected. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). each with multiple design options. the only available command is to create a new option set. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. and delete the unwanted options from the project. 2 In the Design Options dialog. and click Close. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). In the final exercise of this lesson. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. you set up multiple design option sets. click New. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . each is constructed for interchangeability. the roof and structure systems must work together. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Option Set. you design each of the structural options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option.

In the following illustration. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). select: ■ ■ ■ . Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click Modify. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. In this case. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. expand Views (all). Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments.4 In the Project Browser. By selecting Multiple. 7 In the Type Selector. and the third column centered between the two. add three columns. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 9 On the Design Bar. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. or add a dimension string between the columns. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. TIP To center the middle column. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 5 On the View menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. click Column. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. click 12 On the Options Bar. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. expand Floor Plans. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.

16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 18 On the View toolbar. When you are finished. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . A copy of the three selected columns is added. they are difficult to see in this view. Because of the size of the columns. using the same technique. click . 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 17 Zoom out and.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse.

The second click specifies the end of the beam. Adding a beam is a two-click process. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Beam. Next. 19 In the Project Browser. you add the beams that span the columns. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . under Floor Plans. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. Zoom in on the upper right column. 23 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector.Notice the 12 columns that you added. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. click Modify. double-click TOP OF CORE. select Round Bar : 50mm. In it. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. The first click specifies the beam start point. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column.

28 Zoom out. and click the center point. click 26 On the Options Bar. move down to the next set of columns. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar. zoom into the left column. select: ■ ■ ■ . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click .25 On the Edit toolbar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and select the center of the column to add a copy.

45 Under Roofing. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 41 Under Option Set. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. under Option Set. not a new option set. name the option Louvers. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click OK. click Rename. and click OK. 46 Under Option. enter Beam for New. click New. click Rename. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. click Rename. 42 Select Option Set 1 and.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 40 In the Rename dialog. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option. click New. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. under Option. enter Roofing for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click New. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . select Option 1 (primary). 32 In the Design Options dialog. enter Structure for New. under Option Set. click Rename. 37 Select Option 2 and. There should now be two roofing design options. and click OK. 43 In the Rename dialog. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. and click OK. enter Brackets for New. under Option. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Rename. 33 Click Finish Editing. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option.

50 In the Design Options dialog. 53 In the Project Browser. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . select Edit Selected. This allows you to more easily manage the project. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 52 Click Close. you create the second design option. and click OK. click Rename. select Option 2. 48 Under Option. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. under Floor Plans. double-click ROOF TERRACE. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 51 Under Edit. name the option Sunscreen. When finished. Under Now Editing. it will resemble the following illustration. under Structure. select Beam.47 Under Roofing.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Refer to the following illustration. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. click Component. 58 On the Tools menu. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Align. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . select M_Roof Beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 56 In the Type Selector.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Click to indicate the end point of the move. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . The second click represents the move end point. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click Modify. 62 Select the beam and. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. on the Edit toolbar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam.60 After aligning the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. The first click sets the move start point.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click . 66 On the View toolbar. click Save As. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. you need this file in its current state. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . Notice that even before you close the dialog. 70 On the File menu. 67 On the Tools menu. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. m_Urban_House-in progress. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 69 Click Close. and click Save. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. name the file.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. which is visible by default. click Finish Editing. 68 In the Design Options dialog.

With the second option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. under Roofing. 10 Referring to the following illustration. The second roofing system. 5 Click Close. open it now. delete them after the rafter is in place. In the next exercise. Sunscreen. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. you set up multiple design option sets. expand Views (all). you design each of the roofing options. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Louvers (primary). The first option. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. do so now. 3 In the Design Options dialog.rvt. click Edit Selected. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . a Louver system. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. each with multiple design options to pick from. 2 On the Tools menu. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. If you need to add dimensions. expand Floor Plans. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. and double-click TOP OF CORE. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.In this exercise. Under Now Editing. click Component. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 4 Under Edit. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Type Selector. the other for beams. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams.

16 On the Options Bar. under Other. 15 On the Edit menu. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. Enter 5 for Number. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Select Constrain. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click . enter 11750 mm for Length. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. and click OK. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . 13 On the Options Bar. click Array. Select 2nd for Move To.

Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. when the listening dimension displays. and press ENTER. enter 990. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and.

Enter 34 for Number. and select the louver you just placed.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 5475 mm for Length. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 20 In the Type Selector. Select Constrain. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 For the array starting point. Select 2nd for Move To. under Other. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 25 With the louver still selected. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 26 On the Options Bar. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click Component. and click Array. click the Edit menu. click .

enter 300. and press Enter. 29 On the View toolbar. click . when the listening dimension displays. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. and.

31 In the Design Options dialog. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. and then click Close. click Finish Editing. and click OK. 34 In the Project Browser. click Lines. under Edit. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.The louver roof system is complete. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. click . The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. select Sunscreen. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 33 Under Editing. Therefore. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. expand Elevations. 30 On the Tools menu. under Roofing. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Edit Selected. 39 On the Design Bar. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . and double-click West. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 40 On the Options Bar. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. In this case.

48 On the Design Bar. click . 45 Click OK. click Properties. You will fix this in a later step. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. and the third point defines the arc. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. the top of the next column on the right. click Finish Sketch. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 46 On the Tools menu. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. The first two points define the ends of the line. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Select the right arc. Under Constraints. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. Under Constraints. click Trim/Extend. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. The arcs should connect. then you can modify it through the dimension. 41 Select the top of the left column. then the center arc. 49 On the View toolbar.

Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. under Edit. do so now. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. Sunscreen. you designed each of the roofing options. enter Primary Option. The first option. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Rename. After exploring the combinations. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. In this exercise. click Finish Editing. right-click {3D}. a Louver system.The louver roof system is complete. expand 3D Views. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. and click Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Managing Design Options In this exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. tertiary. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. 50 On the Tools menu. Managing Design Options | 757 . under Views (all). under Views (all). and delete the discarded design options. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. you select a design. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The second roofing system. make it part of the building model. you need this file in its current state. and last options. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. 51 In the Design Options dialog. and then click Close. click Save. secondary. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. 52 On the File menu.

11 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 7 On the View menu. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Primary Option. under Views (all). Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. and click Rename. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views.5 Right-click each of the copies. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under 3D Views. double-click Secondary Option. and click OK. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. under Views (all).

double-click Tertiary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. At this point. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. and click OK. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 19 On the View menu. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under Views (all). In this case. Managing Design Options | 759 . 15 On the View menu. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. In your design options.14 In the Project Browser. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. and click OK. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under Views (all). double-click Last Option.

select Make Primary. The set is deleted. but should be accepted as part of the building model. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. since you no longer need them. 33 In the Design Options dialog. under Structure. 25 Select Structure. 35 On the File menu. click Yes. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. This was the client choice for structural. 30 Under Option Set. the beam option becomes part of the model. 24 Under Option. made it part of the building model. double-click Primary Option. click Delete. In this exercise. 27 In the alert dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. the current primaries are no longer options. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. An alert is displayed. 26 Under Option Set. click Yes. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Save. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views.22 On the Tools menu. 29 Select Roofing. After exploring the combinations. you selected a design. click Close. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. Because the client has selected the design option. 31 In the alert dialog. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. select Beam. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Accept Primary. and deleted the discarded design options.

you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. For the client. In the second exercise. demolish existing construction. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. complete with schedules. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow.Project Phasing 22 In any project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. demolish existing walls and doors. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the second exercise. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. 761 . This changes room definition and total building model area. You create new phases. then add new walls and doors in a different location. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. You create new phases. and then add new building model elements. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases.

then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you wish to do so. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. During the demolition and renovation process. expand Floor Plans. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. click (Element Properties). click Modify. 7 Click Cancel. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. expand Views (all). As you add new elements to the building model. When you create a new project. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase.rvt. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. and click OK. regardless of phase. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . go to the Settings menu. click Training Files. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. and open Common\c_Phasing. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. In the Element Properties dialog.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. This means that all building model elements. define the units. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 6 On the Options Bar. are visible in this view. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Project Units. 4 Click Cancel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Phasing. and double-click Level 1. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial.

are highlighted in red. enter Level 1 . and click OK. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click (Filter Selection). 13 In the Element Properties dialog.Existing. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. and click OK. and click OK. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 12 On the Options Bar. including the door tags. After you create the views. and click OK.Existing. 17 Click No. for Phase Created. 11 In the Filter dialog. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. Because this is a renovation project. right-click Level 1 . click . right-click Copy of Level 1 . right-click Level 1. select Existing. 14 On the Design Bar. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views.Demo. Because this is a phase-specific view. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. all of the building model elements. TIP If this were a multi-story building. under Floor Plans. and click Rename.Existing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 10 On the Options Bar. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. enter Level 1 . and click Rename. clear Door Tags. 20 In the Rename dialog. Phasing Your Model | 763 . After you release the mouse button.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 16 In the Rename dialog. under Phasing. under Floor Plans. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it.

and Temporary.Existing. under Floor Plans. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 27 Click New. to which all the building model elements belong. There are five default phase filters. 29 For Composite Plan. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. Demolished. for Phase. double-click Level 1 . enter Composite Plan. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. Because of this time relationship. and click OK. however. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 28 Under Filter Name. Phase status is time-dependent. under Floor Plans.Demo. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. click the Phase Filters tab. You may need to zoom in to see this. select Existing. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Overridden. 26 In the Phasing dialog. Existing. new construction occurs after existing construction. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. On a logical time line. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. In this case. under New. under Phasing. double-click Level 1 . Notice that the line pattern is still gray. Later in this exercise. you modify these settings. 21 In the Project Browser. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. 24 In the Project Browser. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.

36 Using the same method. or you can use the demolish tool. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. double-click Level 1 .Demo. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. click OK. select red. 34 In the Color dialog. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. its display changes to a red dashed line. click the value for Color. you demolish all elements hosted by it.Existing. under Cut ➤ Lines. under Floor Plans. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. click (Demolish). The cursor is displayed as a hammer. under Floor Plans. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. select Demolished. 32 In the Demolished row. As you click each wall. select the line style. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. 35 Click OK twice. you begin demolition. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. Phasing Your Model | 765 . Next. 42 In the Project Browser. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. There are two ways to demolish an element. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog.31 Under Phase Status. select a lighter blue. double-click Level 1 . When you demolish the host. select the interior walls one at a time.

49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The demolished walls no longer display. click Door. select Basic Wall: Interior . and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 53 Open Level 1 . and click OK. 52 Open Level 1 . 51 Add a door leading into each room.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Phase Filter. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.Existing. under Phasing. select Show Previous + New.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). click Wall. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. add a long horizontal wall. 47 In the Type Selector. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Phasing. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. for Phase Filter. 50 In the Type Selector.Demo.

You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. 61 On the View Control Bar. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. regardless of phase. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).New. new is shown in blue. 59 Open Level 1 . 60 On the View toolbar. 57 In the Project Browser. Phasing Your Model | 767 . and existing shows as half-tone. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. All elements are displayed in this view. 62 If necessary. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. click (Default 3D View). right-click Level 1 . 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . which are displayed as red. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. because the phase filter is set to Show All.New.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. The renovated building model plan is displayed.Demo.

Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you can do so at this time. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. All room boundaries are phase-specific. and click OK. and new construction. In this view. In this view. you can see the new walls added to the building model. sizes. You can also see that the room quantities. the rooms change in both definition and size. Notice that this view is the original building model. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .Existing. you do not need to change the project units to metric. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. 3 Open Level 1 . expand Floor Plans. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise.rvt. If you wish to save this file. In this exercise. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. 2 Open Level 1 . The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. define the units. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. demolition. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. expand Views (all). and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags.Demo.New. go to the Settings menu. As the renovation process continues. click Project Units. therefore. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the next exercise. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. If you wish to do so. and double-click Level 1 . 63 Close the file. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.

click Room. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Room Tag. 5 Click OK. Use the following illustration as a guide.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Open Level 1 . and maximize the view. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. In the Phasing dialog. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. yet they have different room numbers. 6 Open Level 1 .New. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click in each room as you move to the right.Demo.Existing. 13 Open Level 1 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. notice that there are two phases defined in this project.

add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 20 Close the file. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 17 On the Window menu. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model.New Construction. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 16 In the Project Browser. In this case. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. click Close Hidden Windows. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .15 Using the following illustration as a guide. View phase-specific room schedules. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. In addition. In this exercise. 18 Open Room Schedule . you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. and double-click Room Schedule . The two schedule views tile. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. click Tile. 19 On the Window menu. expand Schedules/Quantities. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.Existing.

Comparison of alternatives on a site. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. In the final lesson. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. 771 . A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In this tutorial. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. modify their visibility. You position the building models on the site plan. and manage the links throughout the project. This maximizes efficiency. In these situations. performance. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus.

and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. and the other is a townhouse. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. modify their visibility. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. You link two building models to the project.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry.Linking Building Models In this lesson. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You position the building models on the site. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise.

By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates.■ Auto . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. click Close. 8 Clear Read-only. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. click Save As. c_Townhouse. and click OK.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. 4 On the File menu. this system is not exposed to the user. you can do so. select the three files. RELATED See the lesson. Click Open. however.rvt. right-click. click Open. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . Manual . Select c_Site. This option is grayed out. Otherwise. and click Properties. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ Manual . c_Condo_Complex. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Auto . this option will place the link at a predefined location. 5 On the File menu. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. All three files now reside. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. 2 On the File menu. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. and open Common\c_Site. click Training Files.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. and save the file there. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. with write permission.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. in the Model Linking folder that you created. click Open. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.

and make your changes. Notice the blue detail lines.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. select Auto . expand Views (all). click Project Units. If you wish to do so. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. you can go to the Settings menu. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 13 Click Open. and double-click Level 1. 11 On the File menu.Origin to Origin. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.

17 For the move endpoint. After you select it. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Standard move commands work with linked building models. 16 For the move start point. The first click specifies the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.rvt displays in the Type Selector. The Move command requires two clicks. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The linked model moves as one object. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . click (Move). 15 On the Edit toolbar.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.

776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .After you specify the location to move to. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. For Positioning. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 21 Click Open.Origin to Origin. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select Auto . the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 18 On the View menu. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. and select c_Townhouse.

In this case. click (Rotate). the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. when the vertical line displays.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . click to specify the rotation start point. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. 23 On the Edit toolbar.

28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. click (Move). 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

The first click specifies the start point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 .The townhouse is located within its required footprint. click (Copy). 30 For the starting point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command.

32 On the Edit menu. click . for Name. 37 On the View toolbar. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. use the Move command to make any adjustments. click (Default 3D View). and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. under Identity data. click Rotate. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 34 On the Options Bar. enter Townhouse A. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B.

In the next exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. 2 On the SteeringWheels. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. After linking the files. they were placed too low within the site topography. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. In this exercise.38 On the File menu. click and hold Orbit. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. When you originally linked the files. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . click Save. do so before continuing. If you have not completed the previous exercise. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels). you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. you need this project file open and in this view.

you first select the plane you want to align to. 3 In the Project Browser. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . When using the Align command. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. and click to select it. under Views (all). click (Align). and double-click South. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. In this case. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. and click to select the line. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. In the steps that follow. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. expand Elevations.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. when it highlights. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. To do this. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task.rvt. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. and click OK. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. Click the Revit Links tab. and then select the plane that you want to align.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. 15 On the File menu. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 12 On the View toolbar.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click North. click (Default 3D View). 14 On the SteeringWheels. click Save. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. (SteeringWheels). click 13 On the View toolbar. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 11 Return to the South elevation view. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. click and hold Orbit. under Elevations. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

8 For Annotation Categories. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. When you link a file. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. display settings. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. click Custom. If you have not completed the previous exercise. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. or Custom. do so before continuing. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. If the Basics page is set to Custom. click By Host View. In this exercise. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. detail level. under Elevations. 2 On the View menu. 4 Under Visibility. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. scroll down and clear Levels. By linked view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. you can independently control the visibility settings. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file.rvt. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. click OK. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As you can see. 9 Under Visibility. expand c_Townhouse. select <Custom>. 10 Click OK. you need this project file open and in this view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. and the halftone settings for each linked project. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. In the next exercise. double-click South. click Visibility/Graphics. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. click the Revit Links tab.

you can also apply halftone to individual categories. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. In this case. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 20 For c_Townhouse. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. select <Custom>. 23 In the Model categories list. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. medium. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 .rvt. or fine. and click OK. Using the Custom option. under Floor Plans. 24 Click OK. no detail level changes are required. click the Revit Links tab. double-click Level 1. under Display Settings. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. By default. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. click By Host View. By selecting custom under Model Categories. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. on the Basics tab. With linked files.rvt. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. select Custom. and then set the detail level to coarse. 16 Under Visibility. You can click the value for Detail Level. 14 On the View menu. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. expand c_Townhouse.

click Save. 26 Under Display Settings. All other components are grayed out. under Visibility. click OK. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. click Custom for the Townhouse link. demolished. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. In this case.rvt. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. on a sloped site for instance. all new. In the next exercise. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. In this case. 25 On the Revit Links tab. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. In most cases. select c_Townhouse. you need this project file open and in this view. phase. existing. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. this is preferable. 31 On the File menu. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. However. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. With the Show All filter applied. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 28 Select By linked view for View range. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. 29 Click OK. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. you manage the linked files. and phase filter of a specific link. there are situations. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. In this exercise. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. By default.

Locations Not Saved. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.rvt. You learn more about this in the next lesson. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. click the Revit tab. 4 Under Linked File. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. 5 Click Unload. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. In general. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. 6 At the confirmation prompt. and Saved Path fields are read only. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. click Manage Links. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. They supply information regarding the links. 3 Under Path Type. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. If you have not completed the previous exercise. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. do so before continuing. 7 Click OK. As links are moved to new locations in the host project.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. In a shared coordinate environment. The default path type is Relative. the link is maintained. click Yes. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . Notice the Loaded. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. select c_Condo_Complex.

In general. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. 8 In the Project Browser. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. If you choose not to open that workset. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. right-click c_Condo_Complex. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. 9 On the File menu.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. To do this. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. expand Revit Links. click the arrow next to the Open button. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. and select Specify. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. the link is not loaded. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. When you initially place the link. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. click Save As. and click Reload. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. In the Import/Link RVT dialog.rvt. However. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. In these cases.

The host file consists primarily of site components. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project.10 In the Save As dialog. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. When you share coordinates between projects. do so before continuing. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. In essence. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. leave the project file open in its current view. If you have not completed the previous lesson. and the resulting project files. and save it as an RVT file. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. you are establishing a shared origin point. name the file Site_Project. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. In this exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. When used in conjunction with model linking.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. click the Condo Complex.rvt and click Open. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Select Site_Project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. Linking Building Models on page 772. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. When you are working in the host project. If you have not completed the lesson. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. click Open. and the resulting project files. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 2 On the Tools menu. do so before continuing. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. As indicated in the Status Bar.coordinates are used. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you have closed the project. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. 3 In the drawing area. open it before continuing. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. In this case.

then the location becomes saved in the linked file. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. you need this project file open and in this view. and click OK. do so before continuing. These three locations can be named Lot A. Lot B. but can have multiple additional locations. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. this location is not saved outside of the host project. On the Status Bar. it is placed at a specific location. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. 5 On the Design Bar. select Location 1. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. click to select it. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. and Lot C. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. In this exercise. However. when the edges highlight. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. If you have not completed the exercise.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson.

This is a one-time operation. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. 7 In the Rename dialog. Record the current position as a location. under Instance Parameters. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.2 On the Options Bar. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 4 Under Value. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Lot A for New. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select Move instance to. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. . under Instance Parameters. and click OK. click . click Rename. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. click Change. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 3 In the Element Properties dialog. When constraining a link to a location. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. In the Choose Location dialog. and click OK. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. click Reconcile. 12 On the Options Bar. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 9 In the Select Location dialog.

By relocating a project. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. the active location position is moved. and click OK. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. When you relocate a project. 30 On the Tools menu. This is a two-click process. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . although it may appear that the linked files are moving. When you release the mouse button. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. Save locations 21 On the File menu. click OK. click Manage Links. make sure Lot B is selected. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. click the Revit tab. click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. select the second option. 26 Click OK. a warning displays. click Duplicate. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. and then select the townhouse project. 15 In the Choose Location dialog.Notice the OK button is not active. and click OK. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 23 Click Save Locations. 19 In the Select Location dialog. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. To explicitly save a location. select Save. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. and the left townhouse resides at that location. Record current position as. 16 Click Change. you cannot redefine its location. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. and click OK. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. When you create a location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. or cancel the action. enter Lot B for Name. Because Lot A is currently in use. Notice the OK button is still not active. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. ignore the warning. The first click specifies the move start point. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files.

and click OK. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. NOTE In the following exercise. you work in one of the linked projects.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. click Close. 33 On the Edit menu. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu. select Save. In this exercise. 36 On the File menu.

rvt file. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. In addition. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.By Shared Coordinates. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. If you have not completed the exercises. select Auto . Select c_Townhouse and click Open. it is placed automatically within the host project. double-click 1st Floor. do so before continuing. In this exercise. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. click Open. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Because this building model only has one named location. For Positioning.rvt file. Click Open. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. 2 On the File menu. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. under Floor Plans. Also. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. if other models were linked into the same host.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. Select c_Condo_Complex. The current active location is Lot A. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. When opening the linked file.

enter Lot C. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. In the next exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. you can select Lot C if necessary. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. do so before continuing. click View Properties. you create a new location. orient a view to true north. 6 Select Lot B. In this exercise. click Duplicate. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. In this exercise. If you have not completed the exercises. click Manage Place and Locations. 3 In the Name dialog. and click Make Current. In the host file. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. and click OK. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. under Graphics. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. click Manage Place and Locations. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 7 Click OK. select True North for Orientation. you manage the shared locations.

9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. If you have not completed the exercise. On the Options Bar. In this exercise. You can save the file if you wish. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. do so before continuing. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.rvt and click Open. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Close. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Select Site_Project. click Open. 10 On the File menu. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Doors. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. under Category. and click OK. select Count.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Under Available fields.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Close.8 Click OK. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. select Family and Type for Sort by. expand Schedules/Quantities. You have completed this tutorial. right-click Door Schedule. under Other. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 14 On the File menu. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. In this exercise. and then click OK twice. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. clear Itemize every instance. 13 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. click Save. 12 Select Grand totals. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

10 In the Options dialog. notification preferences. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click OK. and set it as your default template. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. you create an office template. you modify the system environment. Notice that the drawing area is black. click the Graphics tab. 803 . click Browse. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 8 In the New Project dialog. selection default options. In the second lesson. and click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. select Invert background color. 6 In the New Project dialog. 11 Under Colors. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click Training Files. 4 Under Colors. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. and your username when using worksets. click the value for Selection color. which is independent of the project settings. journal cleanup options. Finally. click the Graphics tab. These settings control the graphics. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. In the first lesson. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. under Template file. 3 In the Options dialog.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial.rte. they are not saved to project files or template files.

click the Graphics tab. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 15 Click OK. 26 In the Options dialog. When an error occurs. click Modify. and click OK. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 22 When prompted to save changes. select None. click Modify. For Selection color. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click No. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click Wall. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. For Tooltip assistance. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 13 Click the General tab. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element.12 In the Color dialog. and select the wall. select One hour. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 14 Under Notifications. select yellow. However. and open Metric\m_Settings. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval.rvt. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. select red. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. the elements causing the error display using this color. 18 On the Design Bar. clear Invert background color. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Under Username. click Browse. These files are used in the software support process. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. click the File Locations tab. 2 In the Options dialog. and click Open. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Under Journal File Cleanup. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. notice the list of library names. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . 7 In the Options dialog. click Places. do not save the changes. TIP To view a template. 10 In the Places dialog. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. For Tooltip assistance. 8 Click Cancel. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. centralized. such as in a large. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. you specify default file locations. click Browse. and click Browse to select a template. select Normal. If prompted. 5 Under Default path for user files. 3 Under Default template file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. including your default project template. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. family template files. select your preferred Save reminder interval. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 4 Click Cancel. and family libraries.27 Click the General tab. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. However. you can start a new project with that template. Your login name displays by default. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. select the folder to save your files to by default. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Specifying File Locations on page 805. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. under Default path for family template files. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. click Browse.

and select it as the library path.library names and path. or families. and change the name to My Library. and you can create new libraries. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 11 In the Places dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. or loading a Revit Architecture file. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and Import dialogs. under Libraries. and click Open. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. In the following illustration. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Save. Load. saving. templates. When you are opening. click (Add Value). An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and click the icon side of the field.

scroll down the list of building industry terms.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. Save. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. such as bump maps. click the Spelling tab. 5 In the text editor. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . click the My Library icon. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. and decal image files. 3 Under Settings. 24 Click 25 Click OK. If you want to relocate this path. If you work in a large office. 15 Under Library Name. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and Import dialogs. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 9 In the text editor. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 19 Click Cancel. click Edit. 23 Select My Library. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. enter sheetmtl-Cu. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 2 In the Options dialog. custom color files. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 22 Click Places. and click OK twice. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 28 Click OK. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Load. specify the new location here. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click My Library. This path is determined during installation. view the current path. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture.

delete sheetmtl-CU. click Training Files. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 21 In the text editor. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 18 In the Options dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 2 In the New Project dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click OK. 19 Under Settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click the Spelling tab. 23 In the Options dialog. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click default template. In this exercise. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Text. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you modify snap increments.11 In the Options dialog. click OK. As you zoom in and out within a view. under Template file. If prompted. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 22 In the text editor. click Modify. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 20 Under Personal dictionary.rte. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. you modify snap settings. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. work with snapping turned off. do not save the changes. 12 On the Standard toolbar. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. You can turn snap settings on and off. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. click Restore Defaults.

You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 7 Under Object Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . If you do not have a wheel button. enter SM. 8 In the Snaps dialog. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. If it does not. such as ZO to zoom out. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu.. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. snapping reverts to the system default settings. use the wheel button on your mouse. clear Chain. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. While sketching. zoom out until it does so. 10 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to the right.6 Under Dimension Snaps. For example. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. click OK. TIP To zoom while sketching. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. and enter 500 . This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . click Wall. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.

22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. If you move the cursor along the wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. and click Wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 21 Move the cursor downward. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and delete the value 500 . the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. the midpoint. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 18 Enter SM. click Modify. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. click in the Length dimension snap increments box.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Do not set the wall end point. 24 Click OK. and the wall edges. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. This is the increment that you added previously.. it will snap to the endpoints. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and do not save the file. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

When you apply a material to an element. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. lines.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. you render a region to observe the changes.rvt. save the project file with a unique name. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. annotations. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. In the steps that follow. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Finally. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. You create and modify materials. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Settings. Using these options. and object styles. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . fill patterns. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and texture of the material. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. and click OK. for Class. 11 Click OK. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. When you change properties of a render appearance. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click OK. When a model element is loaded into a project. In the next exercise. Masonry . the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone.Fieldstone. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. and click (Element Properties). select Stone. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. and double-click 02 Entry Level. read-only library for render appearances. However. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. 2 Scroll down the materials list.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. 3 Click (Duplicate). 10 Click the Graphics tab. The Render Appearance Library is a local. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. enter Masonry .Fieldstone. 9 Click Apply. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.Stone. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project.Fieldstone material. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 6 Click Replace. In the steps that follow. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. In the Materials dialog. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. this material provides a starting point for the new material. The properties describe the color. scale. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and select Masonry . It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. These details will display in rendered images.

22 Select the left exterior wall. 18 For Finish 1.Fieldstone.Fieldstone. and click OK. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.14 In the Element Properties dialog. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 15 Click Duplicate. and click OK. 25 On the View toolbar. . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall.Brick. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . select Masonry . select the rear exterior wall. click in the Material field. 16 Enter the new wall name. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. click Edit. 26 On the View Control Bar. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 23 While pressing CTRL. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 24 In the Type Selector. 20 In the Materials dialog. click (Default 3D View). Fieldstone on CMU. click Model Graphics Style. 19 On the right side of the Material field. 21 Click OK three times. 17 For Structure. click Edit/New. click This is the material that you created.

select Low or Medium. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. In the following exercise. for Setting. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select the render region (a red rectangle). right-click the Design Bar. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. click Rendering Dialog. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. click Render. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. under Quality. and click Rendering. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. select Region. When finished. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. The rendering process begins.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 28 In the Rendering dialog. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. 29 In the 3D view. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 31 In the Rendering dialog.

rvt. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. select Custom. in the Rendering dialog. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. click Show the model. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Zoom into the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 Click New. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Under Pattern Type. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Then click Render again. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 33 In the Rendering dialog. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern.rvt. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and double-click West. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . and clear Region. expand Elevations. click Import.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. click Show the model. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 7 Under Custom. such as steel. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. choose Model. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting.

16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 10 For Name. select Model. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Fieldstone. and click OK. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. for Finish 1. In the Materials dialog. click Edit. 18 Under Surface Pattern. click . click Training Files. click Modify.pat. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. under Pattern Type. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click to select a fill pattern. and click OK. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select fldstn. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. enter Fieldstone.Fieldstone material. 23 On the Design Bar. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click in the Material field. and for Import scale. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . (Element Properties). enter . 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. click Edit/New.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. click 15 For Structure. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 11 Click OK. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 9 Under Custom. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 22 Click OK three times.56. 21 In the Materials dialog.

Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region).rvt. adjust your zoom settings as needed. click (Default 3D View). Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . 2 On the keyboard. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. For example. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. m_Settings-in progress. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3 Windows.25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. there are often multiple window types within a project. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand 3D Views. TIP If the pattern does not display.

click (Element Properties). 5 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Materials dialog. 9 Click OK twice. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. click By Category (located under the materials list). Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click By Category. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Element Properties). 12 In the Element Properties dialog. . 11 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 10 Select the arched window. click in the Value column. 14 In the Materials dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. and click 15 Click OK twice.3 On the View Control Bar. under Materials and Finishes. under Materials and Finishes. click Modify. click in the Value column. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. for Trim Exterior Material.

Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. or keywords include the word red. . 25 In the search field. enter Trim . select Trim. expand Windows. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. 28 Under Shading. 29 In the Materials dialog. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. select Paint. 23 Click Replace. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. click OK. type red. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 19 For Trim. 18 On the Model Objects tab. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance.red paint. and select Trim. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. for Name. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. descriptions. When you render a 3D view. (Duplicate). 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click OK. click OK. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. for Class. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. and click OK. click in the Material column.

m_Settings-in progress. (Default 3D view). 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog.rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. m_Settings-in progress. Now that you have created a line pattern. enter Roof Line. 7 On the View Control Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. select Red. for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under Category. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 10 For Line Color. 11 For Line Pattern. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Roof Line. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. select Roofs.31 On the View toolbar. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. is open with the 3D view active. click New.rvt. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

but not the line pattern. under 3D Views. double-click to Building. 14 On the View Control Bar.12 Click OK. click Model Graphics Style. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . and verify that Hidden Line is selected. 13 In the Project Browser. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. Notice that the line color displays in this view.

This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. for Visibility. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Category. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Solid. 15 In the Project Browser. select Black. select Roofs. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Roof Line. 18 For Line Color. 20 Click OK. double-click 03 Roof. For Pattern.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 19 For Line Pattern. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. select Blue. Plans. For Color. sections. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select 5. click Override. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 22 On the Model Categories tab. select Roofs. elevations. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select Double dash. Click Click (Draw). Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. select 2. This places the line above the topography. 33 In the Type Selector. enter Zoning Setback. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . 31 Click OK. under Modify Subcategories. For Line Color. click New. double-click Site. 29 For Name. Notice the site topography and the property lines. under Floor Plans. 30 For the Zoning Setback category.25 Click OK twice. For Line Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 34 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Level: 02 Entry Level. select Red. (Line). click Lines. specify the following: ■ For Plane. select Zoning Setback.

Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. Expand Site. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and then clear Property Lines. 36 On the View toolbar. 40 In the Project Browser. 43 Click OK. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Lines. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. Modifying Annotations on page 825. and clear Zoning Setback. select it. 44 On the View toolbar. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. and clear Zoning Setback. NOTE If Site is not selected.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. (Default 3D View). 39 Click OK. double-click 02 Entry Level. 38 On the Model Categories tab. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and clear Property Lines.

Modifying Annotations | 825 .Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 10 On the Standard toolbar. select Feet and fractional inches. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. m_Settings-in progress. m_Settings-in progress.Imperial. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.rvt. 4 Enter the name Linear . Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. For Units. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click another wall. for Units Format. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. To place a dimension. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Imperial and click OK. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click one wall. and then click outside the second wall. click Duplicate. 5 Under Text. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. select Linear . (Undo). click the default value. 9 In the Type Selector. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. and place a dimension on the floor plan. double-click 02 Entry Level. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. 7 Click OK twice.rvt. You have created a new dimension style.

clear Leader. click M_Window Tag . notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 27 On the west wall. In the steps that follow. under Category. Leave M_Window Tag . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.Number is now the assigned tag. 19 Click Load. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. In the preview image. scroll down to Windows. 26 On the Options Bar.Number. click Tag ➤ By Category. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.Number as the assigned tag. click Tag All Not Tagged. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 18 In the Tags dialog. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. select the 3 window tags. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . notice that the label displays 1i. 23 Click OK.Number. 28 On the Design Bar. 16 Click Cancel. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog.14 On the Options Bar. 22 Under Loaded Tags. click Training Files. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag .rfa. click (Element Properties). 24 While pressing CTRL. Then press Delete. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. click the bottom window. 21 In the Tags dialog.

and Detail Level Options | 827 . you specify the project units of measurements. the other displays the instance value. and click OK. you modify the detail level assignments. select Openings. 6 Click OK. M_Window Tag . Specifying Units of Measurement. verify that Create is clear. dimensions use these project settings.Temporary Dimensions. click Modify. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. and click OK.Temporary Dimensions. dimension values display using this setting. select To the nearest 100. m_Settings-in progress. In the first section. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view.Under Category. 32 On the View toolbar. 9 Under Doors and Windows. 30 Under Leader. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Click OK. 8 Under Walls. click the default value. notice Window Tags appears twice. For Unit symbol. Unless overridden. 2 In the Project Units dialog. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. for Rounding. and Detail Level Options on page 827. 31 On the Design Bar. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. for Length.Number. Specifying Units of Measurement. Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. 3 In the Format dialog. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Default 3D View). you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. In the final section. Specifying Units of Measurement. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. select Faces. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. you modify the temporary dimension settings. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. click the default value. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Unless overridden. In the second section. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. select 0 decimal places. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. for Area. select meters squared.

Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. click . you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 Click OK. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. click Training Files. When you create a new view and specify its view scale.In this project. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. expand Views (all). These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. and expand 3D Views. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. In this table. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. You do not select a view scale to move it.

select Discipline. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and click Apply. notice that views are grouped by phase. and click OK. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. In the Project Browser. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . expand Sheets (all). 10 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. 8 Select Phase.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . expand each view type. 2 In the Project Browser.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 5 On the Views tab. In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and notice that each is grouped by discipline.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and click OK. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.

13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 Click the Sheets tab. and click New. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click the Folders tab. 16 Click the Views tab. and click OK. under Sheets. expand each sheet set. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK.

In this lesson. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. 2 Under Template file. navigate to your preferred directory. When you create a new template based on an existing template. click Training Files. View Type (Family and Type). A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. For example. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and click OK. In the lesson that follows. and Discipline. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. enter a unique file name. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. levels. expand Complete. under Views. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. and click OK. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. Creating an Office Template on page 831. you create an office template. 21 In the Project Browser. Whenever you create a new project or template. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. and view names. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. the same rules apply. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. In that case. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. and open Metric\Templates. You can also save these settings in a template file. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. you select the starting point for your office template. When you create new projects. dimensions styles. expand 3D Views.rte template. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. You can choose from several templates. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. click Browse. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. Proceed to the next lesson. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. and click Open. Creating an Office Template | 831 . a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. If you want to save this file. when you create a new project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and expand both Architectural and Structural.

For example.5 In the New Project dialog. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Select the default template. select Project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 6 Click OK. you modify the project settings for your new template. select Project template. 14 Click Open. 7 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Create new. In this exercise. and double-click North. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. for Create new. and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. weights. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. When you create the material. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. If you want to use a template other than the default. close them. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 Under Template File. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 In the Project Browser. you can select it now. in the drawing area. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. If you have additional projects open. click Browse. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template.

4 Click Replace. see a preview of the rendered material. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. line patterns. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. or modify existing patterns. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. and materials for model objects.During this exercise. For more details on modifying these settings. or refer to the online help. annotation objects. texture. and change render appearance properties. transparency. or refer to the online help. TIP For more information about creating new materials. create new subcategories. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. see the previous lesson. you can set line weights. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. and move model patterns. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. You do this by defining the render appearance. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. For more information. the changes are saved as part of the project template. including color. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. If you change render appearance properties. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and imported objects. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. Observe the materials that are already defined. In the Object Styles dialog. When you create or modify a material. specific modifications are not dictated. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. Modifying System Settings on page 803. 13 If necessary. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. You can align. 9 Click OK when finished. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. and scroll through the list of categories. create and modify them as needed. line colors. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . 2 Scroll down the materials list. rotate. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. and similar attributes. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials.

39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. tags. 19 If necessary. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design.15 Modify categories. select it from this list. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 18 For existing line categories. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 34 Click OK. 32 To modify a line pattern. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. and click Edit. and dimensions. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. and create new subcategories as needed. such as section lines and dimension lines. line color. name the style. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. select it. modify the line weight. click Duplicate. or line pattern as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. To see the details of a particular style. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. create new line subcategories. 20 Click OK. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 29 Click OK. You can add and delete view scales. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. and specify the properties. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.

50 To load new annotation tags. angular. For example. and click OK. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 60 Under Walls. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 46 Click OK. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. name the style. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. TIP In the drawing area. Volume. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and choose a decimal symbol. In the Tags dialog. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. click Duplicate. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. and Angle settings. To see the details of a particular style. 61 Under Doors and Windows. select it from this list. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 58 Click OK. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. and specify the properties. click Format. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 62 Click OK. 57 Specify the Slope option. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 53 For Length. 55 Click OK. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Linear. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category.40 Click OK. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. click Load. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag.

To move the view scales. 72 If necessary. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 73 Click OK. Medium. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. When you create a new view. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. or edit existing organization types. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. or Fine. 65 Click OK. rename. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Links to associated tutorials are provided. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. 64 Review the table. create new browser organization types. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. Although these settings can be saved within a template. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. See Setting up If necessary. Using the arrows between the columns. For example. 71 Delete. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. In a typical project. The detail level is based on view scale. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. and move view scales as needed. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. 70 Click the Sheets tab. 68 Delete. or edit existing organization types. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. create new browser organization types. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. You can find additional information in Help. click the Views tab. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 69 If necessary. In such a case. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Use the table below as a checklist. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. rename. However. click the arrows between columns.

you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. modify. you may want to delete. or add to this selection. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. you can set up the phases. In addition. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . Although this is possible. title blocks. Although the options are endless. For example. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If this selection is satisfactory. If you have not completed the previous exercise. For example. you can move onto the next component type. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. there are some important thoughts to consider. you do both. and the poche depth. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. the section cut material. In the steps that follow. click Door. notice the list of doors already loaded. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. if you load every available window type. Depending on the intended use of this template. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. you could load detail components. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. 2 In the Type Selector. phase filters. or use the Project Browser. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. you can set the default contour line interval.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. do so before starting this exercise. or electrical fixtures. furniture. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. and electrical fixtures. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. If necessary. You can load any family or group into a template. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. However. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. 75 Proceed to the next exercise.

You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. expand Families. create. click Edit/New. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. or modify a door. and click OK. and click OK.3 To modify. Enter a name. create. click Load. or load a new door type. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. click Bar. Notice that each family category is listed. In the Element Properties dialog. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. click Edit/New. and click Open. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Modify type properties. Click Duplicate. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Select it. Make modifications. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.

click Load. This title block is currently part of the template. View Range. In addition. you created new projects using different templates. and click Delete. or modify any component families or groups as necessary.) 10 Expand the title block. 11 On the Options Bar. click 12 Click Preview. In this exercise. In addition. Detail Level. right-click the component. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. create. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. you create the views required for your template. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. To load a title block. load. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. (Element Properties). Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. 13 Click OK. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. To do so. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . and select the title block type.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. Discipline. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.

8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. select Site Plan. 15 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template.settings of categories and subcategories. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. select Architectural Plan. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 11 Click Apply. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. under Elevations. and double-click Level 1. double-click Site. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. you can apply a view template to any view. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 6 Click OK. double-click South. 2 Under Names. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. click Apply. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. open the view from the Project Browser. 4 If necessary. and click OK. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 12 In the Project Browser. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. Every time a new plan view is created. click Apply. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. and click OK. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. double-click Level 2. After applying the template. under Floor Plans. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. In addition. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you will first modify view templates. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and apply the appropriate template. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. At any time.

click Level. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter a view name. click Orient to a Direction. and click Rename. duplicate. and. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 23 To add more levels to the template. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. right-click {3D}. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. click 29 In the Project Browser. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 27 Create additional levels as needed. and select the desired view. Blue level heads have associated plan views. If you want to modify view properties. To orient the 3D view to a direction. ceiling plans. under 3D Views.Notice the level names. review the existing floor plans. and select the desired direction. notice that you have the option to rename. or delete them as needed. right-click the view name. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. or an edge of the ViewCube. If it does not display. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. use the ViewCube. If prompted. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. in the shortcut menu. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. review the floor plans. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . right-click Level 1. click Schedule/Quantities. right-click the ViewCube. on the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. By default. select Make Plan View. under Floor Plans. 24 On the Options Bar. To orient the 3D view to another view. 31 Rename the 3D View. in the Project Browser. a face. and elevations. and click Save View. right-click the ViewCube. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. under Floor Plans. click Orient to View. Rename. right-click the ViewCube. 30 In the Project Browser. (Default 3D View). 22 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. or delete this view. Black level heads have no associated views. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. duplicate.

select the title block and delete it. and click OK. and click Rename. expand Sheets (all). and modify their properties accordingly. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. modify settings as needed. click Add View. On the Filter tab. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Right-click the sheet name. To do so. select and order required fields. and click Add View to Sheet. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise.txt for MicroStation). select the default title block. and click OK. After the sheet is created. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. When you import a DWG or DXF file. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. modify settings as needed. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. 42 Create new sheets as needed. assign filters. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842.txt for AutoCAD. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. You are prompted to select a title block. On the Appearance tab. modify settings as needed. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. 37 Click OK. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. Select a view. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. in the Project Browser.You can add schedules to a template. You can still add views to the sheet. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. on the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. To later add a title block to a sheet. or exportlayersdgn. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. select one. On the Formatting tab. click Sheet. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select the category type. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. 40 To add views to the sheet.

Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. and so on. 2 For each category. When scheduling. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. and they become the set mappings for the project. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. These settings are retained within the project template. and click Save. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. project parameters. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. name the file. windows. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. 5 For each category. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. name the file. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. for example. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. doors. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 8 In the dialog. For example. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Using shared parameters. select Save As. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and click Save. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). and so on. and related multi-category tags and schedules. They cannot be shared with other projects. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . You can save these mappings to a text file. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. 9 Click Save As. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. name the file. therefore. When you create a multi-category schedule. and click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN.

25 Click Select. 14 Click Add. 17 Under Discipline. click New. select Project parameter. 23 Add project parameters as needed. If a file already exists. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 21 Under Categories. and specify its discipline and type. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. you can create a list of parameters. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 22 Click OK. click Add. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. add required parameters. For each parameter group. select a parameter value type. click New. under Groups. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. enter a parameter name.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 5 Enter the group name. project parameters. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 6 Create as many groups as needed. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. because each office has a unique set of needs. 8 Under Parameters. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. you may want to save the file to a network location. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 26 Click OK. 10 Click OK. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. and select Shared Parameter. and click OK. 9 Name the parameter. select a parameter discipline type. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 16 Under Parameter Data. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 11 For each parameter group. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. for Name. 19 Under Group parameter under. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 3 Name and save the file. and choose a shared parameter. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 2 Click Create. 18 Under Type of Parameter. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select a group to add parameters to.

By going first to the Print command. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . you can load them into the template. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter a name for the schedule. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. and make it your default template file. click OK. you need only select a setting. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. paper placement. for Name. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. select Multi-Category. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. In this exercise. click Setup. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. For each printer. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 2 Under Printer.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 4 Modify the printer settings. 37 When you have completed the schedule. and click Open. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 34 For Category. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. and click OK. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. and the percent of actual size. you create named print settings. For information on creating multi-category tags. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. 3 Under Settings. or refer to the online help. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. make minor modifications if necessary. and print. By creating named settings within the template. click Schedule/Quantities. The tag is now part of the template. Click OK. save the file as a template. 5 Click Save As. select the tag. 28 Click OK. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 6 In the New dialog. 32 Navigate to the directory. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 35 For Name.

22 Click the File Locations tab. and create new settings for this printer. In addition. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. By investing the time to individualize your template. 20 Click OK. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. You can also set this template as your default template. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. Create additional settings as needed. click Setup. 15 Name the template. modify the printer settings. select a different printer. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. In this lesson. 25 Click OK. 11 Click Close when finished.rte). 14 Under Save as type. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. you ensure that office standards are maintained. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 24 Navigate to the template location. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . enter a new name for the printer. select Template Files (*. select it. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. In addition. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. you modified settings. 18 Click Browse. save it in a network location. 9 In the Print dialog. If you need to share this file with others. Your template is complete. 19 Select the template. and click Save. loaded components. 23 For Default template file. This can provide a good starting point for a template. and click Open. click Save as. and click Open. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. and click OK. If you have a project. and saved them to a template. click Browse. The only remaining task is to save it.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful